Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 188

Installation

Base Transceiver Station Equipment

IMN:BTSE
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II
A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

f Important Notice on Product Safety


DANGER - RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK OR DEATH - FOLLOW ALL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.
The system complies with the standard EN 60950 / IEC 60950. All equipment connected to the system must
comply with the applicable safety standards.
Hazardous voltages are present at the AC power supply lines in this electrical equipment. Some components may
also have high operating temperatures.
Failure to observe and follow all installation and safety instructions can result in serious personal injury
or property damage.
Therefore, only trained and qualified personnel may install and maintain the system.

The same text in German:


Wichtiger Hinweis zur Produktsicherheit
LEBENSGEFAHR - BEACHTEN SIE ALLE INSTALLATIONSHINWEISE.
Das System entspricht den Anforderungen der EN 60950 / IEC 60950. Alle an das System angeschlossenen
Geräte müssen die zutreffenden Sicherheitsbestimmungen erfüllen.
In diesen Anlagen stehen die Netzversorgungsleitungen unter gefährlicher Spannung. Einige Komponenten
können auch eine hohe Betriebstemperatur aufweisen.
Nichtbeachtung der Installations- und Sicherheitshinweise kann zu schweren Körperverletzungen oder
Sachschäden führen.
Deshalb darf nur geschultes und qualifiziertes Personal das System installieren und warten.

Caution:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with EN 301489. Its class of conformity is defined in table
A30808-X3247-X910-*-7618, which is shipped with each product. This class also corresponds to the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is
operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accor-
dance with the relevant standards referenced in the manual “Guide to Documentation”, may cause harmful inter-
ference to radio communications.
For system installations it is strictly required to choose all installation sites according to national and local require-
ments concerning construction rules and static load capacities of buildings and roofs.
For all sites, in particular in residential areas it is mandatory to observe all respectively applicable electromagnetic
field / force (EMF) limits. Otherwise harmful personal interference is possible.

Trademarks:
All designations used in this document can be trademarks, the use of which by third parties for their own purposes
could violate the rights of their owners.

Copyright (C) Siemens AG 2006.

Issued by the Communications Group


Hofmannstraße 51
D-81359 München

Technical modifications possible.


Technical specifications and features are binding only insofar as
they are specifically and expressly agreed upon in a written contract.

2 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

Reason for Update


Summary:
Seventeenth Edition, release-independent, valid from starting Release BR 6.0

Details:
Chapter / Section Reason for Update

2.7.3 New Battery Tray with MK:BATTFIXCB included

Issue History
Issue Date of Issue Reason for Update

1 06/2002 First Edition

2 07/2002 Second Edition

3 09/2002 Third Edition

4 11/2002 Fourth Edition

5 04/2003 Fifth Edition

6 12/2003 Sixth Edition

7 02/2004 Seventh Edition

8 03/2004 Eighth Edition

9 05/2004 Ninth Edition

10 08/2004 Tenth Edition

11 01/2005 Eleventh Edition

12 04/2005 Twelfth Edition

13 07/2005 Thirteenth Edition

14 09/2005 Fourteenth Edition

15 11/2005 Fifteenth Edition

16 03/2006 Sixteenth Edition

17 04/2006 Seventeenth Edition

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 3
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

4 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

This document consists of a total of 188 pages. All pages are issue 17.

Contents
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.1 Purpose of the Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.2 Installation Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.3 Handling of the Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

2 Base Station Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17


2.1 Position in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.2 Site Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.3 Site Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.4 Construction Overview of the BS-Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.4.1 Rack Configuration of different BS-Variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.4.1.1 Rack Configurations BS-240. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.4.1.2 Rack Configurations of the BS-240 II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.4.1.3 Rack Configurations for BS-240XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.4.1.4 Rack Configurations for BS-240XL II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.5 Equipment Delivery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.5.1 Preliminary Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.5.2 Rack mounted on a Pallet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.5.3 Rack shipped in a Crate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.5.4 Unpacking of Modules and Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.5.5 Rack Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.5.5.1 Setup of Earthquake Mounting Kit for BS-240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
2.5.5.2 Setup of Earthquake Mounting Kit for BS-240XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2.5.6 Setup of Earthquake Mounting Kit for BS-240 II / 240XL II. . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
2.5.7 Back-to-back Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
2.6 External Cabling Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
2.6.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
2.6.2 Ground and AC- Power Supply Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
2.6.3 Ground and DC- Power Supply Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
2.6.4 Abis-Interface - PCM Link Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
2.6.4.1 Abis-Interface for 120 Ohm Cable Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
2.6.4.2 Abis-Interface with ABISCONCX / OVPTCOAX 75 Ohm . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
2.6.4.3 Abis-Interface without ABISCON / OVPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
2.6.4.4 Monitoring Interfaces of ABISCON and OVPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
2.6.5 Alarm Collection Terminal - external Alarm Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
2.6.6 Installation of the Mounting Kit OPEXAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
2.6.7 Installation of the MK:OPEXAL10V1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
2.6.8 External Alarm Protection for ACTM (EAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
2.6.9 Alarm Collection Terminal ACTC - internal Alarms / DC Supply. . . . . . . . . 84
2.6.10 Alarm Collection Terminal ACTC-3 - internal Alarms / DC Supply . . . . . . . 87
2.6.11 Alarm Collection Terminal ACTC-4 - internal Alarms / DC Supply . . . . . . . 89
2.6.12 Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
2.6.13 Antenna Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
2.6.13.1 Preparation of Antenna Jumper Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 5
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

2.6.14 Installation of the Tower Mounted Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99


2.6.14.1 Installation of the TMADV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
2.6.14.2 Installation of the STMAx / DTMAx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
2.7 Rack Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
2.7.1 Preparation of the Top Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
2.7.2 Overview of Battery Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
2.7.3 Installation of Backup Batteries in Service Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
2.7.3.1 Installation of Backup Batteries Type “Excide”. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
2.7.3.2 Installation of Backup Batteries Type “Oerlicon” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
2.7.3.3 Install Backup Batteries Type “EnerSys / Hawker” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
2.7.4 Inter-Rack Cable Routing (standard Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
2.7.4.1 Battery Cabling of BS-240 / 240XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
2.7.4.2 Battery Cabling for BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
2.7.4.3 Battery Cabling for BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
2.7.4.4 Battery Alarm Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
2.7.4.5 DC Cabling between the Racks (BS-240 / 240XL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
2.7.4.6 DC Connections BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
2.7.4.7 -48V DC Connections BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1). . . . . . . . . . . 133
2.7.4.8 -48 V DC for Link Equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3). . . . 134
2.7.4.9 -48 V DC for Link Equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1) . . . 135
2.7.4.10 CAN-Bus Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
2.7.4.11 SELIC-Cabling between the Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
2.7.5 Inter-Rack Cabling (mixed Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
2.7.5.1 Battery Cabling between BS-240 and BS-240 II Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
2.7.5.2 Battery Cabling between BS-240XL and BS-240XL II Racks . . . . . . . . . . 144
2.7.5.3 Battery Cabling Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
2.7.5.4 -48V DC Cabling BS-240 / S1 and BS-240 II / Base, Extension . . . . . . . . 147
2.7.5.5 -48V DC Cabling BS-240 II / S1A and BS-240 / Base, Extension . . . . . . 148
2.7.5.6 -48V DC Cabling BS-240 / S1 and BS-240 II / S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
2.7.5.7 DC Cabling BS-240 II / S1A and BS-240 / S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
2.7.5.8 DC Cabling BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XL II / Base, Extension . . . . . . . . 153
2.7.5.9 DC Cabling BS-240XL II / S1A and BS-240XL / Base, Extension . . . . . . . 154
2.7.5.10 DC Cabling BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XL II / S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
2.7.5.11 DC Cabling BS-240XL II / S1A and BS-240XL / S2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
2.7.5.12 SELIC-Cabling between the Racks (mixed Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
2.7.6 Combination of Racks with different Heights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
2.7.6.1 BS-240 II / S1A with BS-240XL II / Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
2.7.7 Installation of Link Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
2.7.7.1 Installation of Microwave Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
2.7.7.2 Installation of NTPM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
2.8 Installation of the Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
2.9 Nonstandard Installation Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
2.9.1 Installation of the AC/DC Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
2.10 Setup of System Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
2.10.1 System Cabling with semi-rigid Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
2.10.2 System Cabling with Flexi-Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
2.10.3 Terminators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

6 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

2.11 Post Installation Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180


2.11.1 Disposal of Electrical and Electronic Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

3 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
3.1 Installation Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
3.2 Ancillary Material. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
3.3 Technical Data of BS-240/240XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
3.4 Configuration Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
3.5 Checklist for Base Station Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

4 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 7
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

Illustrations
Fig. 1.1 ESD Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Fig. 1.2 ESD jack for wrist strap connection of BS-240 / 240XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Fig. 1.3 ESD press-stud for wrist strap connection of BS-240 II / 240 XL II . . . . 16
Fig. 2.1 Position of the Base Station within the SBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Fig. 2.2 Site configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Fig. 2.3 Rack types of the BS-240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Fig. 2.4 Service1 rack configurations of the BS-240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Fig. 2.5 Service2 rack configurations of the BS-240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Fig. 2.6 Types of BS-240 II racks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Fig. 2.7 Types of BS-240XL racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Fig. 2.8 Types of BS-240XL II Racks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Fig. 2.9 ShockwatchTM-label and TiltwatchTM-label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Fig. 2.10 Rack mounted on the pallet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Fig. 2.11 Dismounting the rack from the pallet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Fig. 2.12 Removal of the straps, opening of the top cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Fig. 2.13 Removal of the packing material. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Fig. 2.14 Opening of the PE-wrap, lifting straps around the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Fig. 2.15 Unpacking of the battery sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Fig. 2.16 Removal of top cover for crane eye access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Fig. 2.17 Opening of rack door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Fig. 2.18 Removal of the top cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Fig. 2.19 Guideline for crane transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Fig. 2.20 Space necessary for installation of Base Station rack variants . . . . . . . 34
Fig. 2.21 Adjusting and fixing of the rack feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Fig. 2.22 Floor and wall mounting of the racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Fig. 2.23 Earthquake mounting kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Fig. 2.24 Drilling sketch for earthquake mounting kit (2 racks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Fig. 2.25 Drilling sketch for earthquake mounting kit (2 racks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Fig. 2.26 Parts of the earthquake mounting kit for the BS-240XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Fig. 2.27 Mounting of Pos. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Fig. 2.28 Mounting of stiffening parts (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Fig. 2.29 Mounting of stiffening parts (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Fig. 2.30 Parts of the earthquake kit S3086-K4119-X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Fig. 2.31 Double claw for the rear feet in mounted position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Fig. 2.32 Claws for the front feet before mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Fig. 2.33 Drilling sketch for the earthquake mounting kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Fig. 2.34 Back-to-back configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Fig. 2.35 Side-by-side configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Fig. 2.36 Back-to-back configuration with Extension1 and Extension2 . . . . . . . . 44
Fig. 2.37 Back-to-back configuration with Service1 and Service2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Fig. 2.38 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 Base Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Fig. 2.39 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 Extension Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Fig. 2.40 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240/240XL Service1Rack . . . . . . . . . . . 51

8 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

Fig. 2.41 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240/240XL Service2 Rack . . . . . . . . . . 52


Fig. 2.42 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL Base Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Fig. 2.43 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL Extension Rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Fig. 2.44 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 II Base Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Fig. 2.45 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 II Extension Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Fig. 2.46 Interfaces on the EMI-Panel of the BS-240 II/240XL II Service1 Rack . 54
Fig. 2.47 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 II /240XL II Service2 Rack. . . . . . . 55
Fig. 2.48 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL II Base Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Fig. 2.49 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL II Extension Rack . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Fig. 2.50 Locations of the connectors for external cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Fig. 2.51 Ground and AC mains connections (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Fig. 2.52 Wiring example of the 230 Vac terminal block (BS-240 Service1 Rack) 59
Fig. 2.53 Ground- and power supply connections with -48V DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Fig. 2.54 Terminal block for -48 V DC input of MSU (BS-240) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Fig. 2.55 Preparation of a PCM-cable, 120 Ω impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Fig. 2.56 Fastening of PCM cables at OVPT / ABISCON (120 Ω) . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Fig. 2.57 Abis interface PCM0 Pin Assignment, 120 Ohm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Fig. 2.58 Abis interface PCM1 Pin Assignment, 120 Ohm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Fig. 2.59 OVPTCOAX with 1,0/2,3 coaxial connectors, 75 Ω . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Fig. 2.60 Monitoring interfaces for PCM lines of ABISCON / OVPT . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Fig. 2.61 ACTM terminal numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Fig. 2.62 Contents of the MK:OPEXAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Fig. 2.63 Drilling sketch for MK:OPEXAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Fig. 2.64 Wall mounted MK:OPEXAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Fig. 2.65 Routing of external alarm cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Fig. 2.66 Assembly Guideline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Fig. 2.67 ACTM, connection of the cables from OPEXAL10V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Fig. 2.68 Connector assignment of the OPEXAL10V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Fig. 2.69 Label with terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Fig. 2.70 Mounting of the EAP on the top of the BS-240 II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Fig. 2.71 Connector arrangement at ACTC (BS-240). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Fig. 2.72 Connector arrangement at ACTC (BS-240XL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Fig. 2.73 Connector arrangement at the ACTC-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Fig. 2.74 Connector arrangement at the ACTC-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Fig. 2.75 Cell numbering (top view from the antenna pole) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Fig. 2.76 Tools for jumper fabrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Fig. 2.77 Parts of the connector unit kit (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Fig. 2.78 Using the trimming tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Fig. 2.79 Removal of isolation and deburring of inner conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Fig. 2.80 Removal of metal particles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Fig. 2.81 Assembly of the connector unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Fig. 2.82 Fixing of connector unit, removal of outer insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Fig. 2.83 Handling of heat protection tape and shrink sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Fig. 2.84 Shrinkage and removal of visible heat protection tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 9
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

Fig. 2.85 Max. dimensions of the antenna connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97


Fig. 2.86 Opening of the cable feeding module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Fig. 2.87 Antenna jumpers at the cable feeding module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Fig. 2.88 Antenna jumpers at the cable feeding module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Fig. 2.89 Position of TMA (DUAMCO combiner used). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Fig. 2.90 Position of TMA (FICOM combiner used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Fig. 2.91 Configuration with HPDU, DUBIAS and TMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Fig. 2.92 Installation of TMA and DUBIAS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Fig. 2.93 Bottom view of the TMADV1 (Single TMA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Fig. 2.94 TMA with mounting brackets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Fig. 2.95 Example of STMAx and DTMAx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Fig. 2.96 Rear side of STMAx and DTMAx (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Fig. 2.97 Example of pole mounting with the STMAx ( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Fig. 2.98 Contents of the connection kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Fig. 2.99 Setup of EMC sealing stripes (BS-240 / 240XL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Fig. 2.100 Setup of EMC sealing contact springs (BS-240 II / 240XL II) . . . . . . . . 106
Fig. 2.101 Connection of the racks (example with BS-240). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Fig. 2.102 Paint retouch of the top cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Fig. 2.103 Placement of the sealing profile tapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Fig. 2.104 Parts for battery fixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Fig. 2.105 Placement of the spacer strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Fig. 2.106 Preparation of the battery tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Fig. 2.107 Battery tray with backup batteries type “Excide”. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Fig. 2.108 Connection of backup battery set “Excide” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Fig. 2.109 Contents of the air vent kit “Excide” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Fig. 2.110 Assembly of the air vent kit “Excide”. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Fig. 2.111 Connection of backup batteries (Co. Oerlicon) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Fig. 2.112 Air vent system for Oerlicon battery set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Fig. 2.113 Location of the Battery Breakers at the AD-Panel ADPAV3 . . . . . . . . . 117
Fig. 2.114 Placement and connection of the batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Fig. 2.115 Detail of the connection of battery 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Fig. 2.116 Parts of the air vent system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Fig. 2.117 Routing of the air vent tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Fig. 2.118 Connection between the batteries, battery cable connection . . . . . . . . 120
Fig. 2.119 Terminal blocks for battery cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Fig. 2.120 Overview of the battery cabling BS-240 / 240 XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Fig. 2.121 Example of battery cabling of BS-240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3). . . . . . . . . 124
Fig. 2.122 Example of battery cabling of BS-240 II (S1A, ADPAV3) . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Fig. 2.123 Overview of battery breakers in S1A / S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Fig. 2.124 Example of battery cabling of BS-240 II (S1A, ADP-2V1) . . . . . . . . . . 127
Fig. 2.125 Example of battery cabling of BS-240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1) . . . . . . . . 128
Fig. 2.126 Battery alarm cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Fig. 2.127 Routing of the DC power supply wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Fig. 2.128 DC terminal block access of BS-240 / 240XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

10 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

Fig. 2.129 Routing of DC cabling between the BS-240 racks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130


Fig. 2.130 Routing of DC cabling between BS-240XL racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Fig. 2.131 DC cabling between the BS-240 II / 240 XL II racks (S1A, ADPAV3) . 132
Fig. 2.132 DC cabling between the BS-240 II / 240 XL II racks (S1A, ADP-2V1). 133
Fig. 2.133 DC cabling for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3) 134
Fig. 2.134 DC cabling for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1) 135
Fig. 2.135 DC cabling for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1) 136
Fig. 2.136 Location of CAN-Bus interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Fig. 2.137 Example for CAN-Bus cable connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Fig. 2.138 Location of SELIC interfaces (BS-240) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Fig. 2.139 SELIC-cabling between the racks BS-240 / 240 II. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Fig. 2.140 Location of SELIC interfaces (BS-240XL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Fig. 2.141 SELIC-cabling of BS-240XL / 240XL II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Fig. 2.142 Adaptation of the top cover for interrack cable routing . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Fig. 2.143 Example of Battery Cabling with BS-240 and BS-240 II Service Racks142
Fig. 2.144 Example of Battery Cabling BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XL II / S2 . . . 144
Fig. 2.145 Battery Cables 110*/M and 111*/M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Fig. 2.146 WAGO terminal for battery cabling at F:AC/DC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Fig. 2.147 -48V DC connections BS-240 / S1 and BS-240II / Base and E1 . . . . . 147
Fig. 2.148 DC cabling BS-240 II / S1A and BS-240 / Base, E1 (S1A, ADPAV3) . 148
Fig. 2.149 DC cables from Service1A to Base and Extension1(S1A, ADP-2V1) . 149
Fig. 2.150 DC cabling between BS-240 / S1 and BS-240 II / S2 racks . . . . . . . . 150
Fig. 2.151 DC cables between BS-240II/ S1A and BS-240/S2 (S1A, ADPAV3) 151
Fig. 2.152 DC cables between BS-240UII/S1A and BS-240/S2 (S1A, ADP-2V1) 152
Fig. 2.153 DC connections between BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XLII / Base, E1 153
Fig. 2.154 DC connections between BS-240XLII / S1A and BS-240XL / Base, E1154
Fig. 2.155 DC connections between BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XL II / S2 . . . . . 155
Fig. 2.156 DC connections between BS-240XL II/ S1A and BS-240XL / S2 . . . . 156
Fig. 2.157 DC connection (BS-240 / S1A with BS-240XL II / Extension) . . . . . . . 158
Fig. 2.158 (View A) Preparation of the DC cables at the cable feeding module . . 159
Fig. 2.159 (View B) Cable connections to Ground and MSU:DC of Extension. . . 159
Fig. 2.160 Mounting Kit for Link Equipment MK:LE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Fig. 2.161 Cabling for link equipment (BS-240 / 240XL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Fig. 2.162 Connection of the DC supply cables (cable no. 401). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Fig. 2.163 DC distribution block with microwave units in Service1A (BS-240 II) . 163
Fig. 2.164 DC distribution block with microwave units in Service2 (BS-240 II). . . 163
Fig. 2.165 Overview of microwave cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Fig. 2.166 Overview of NTPM cabling variants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Fig. 2.167 Interfaces on frame F:NT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Fig. 2.168 Fixing variants of the modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Fig. 2.169 Handling of the lever mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Fig. 2.170 Location of the code key no. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Fig. 2.171 Components of the AC/DC frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Fig. 2.172 Fitting of the air flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 11
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

Fig. 2.173 Setup of the rubber sealing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171


Fig. 2.174 Plug-in of the fan cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Fig. 2.175 Air duct mounting, disconnection CAN-BUS cable no. 91 . . . . . . . . . . 172
Fig. 2.176 Connection CAN-BUS and Interconnection Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Fig. 2.177 Cable Connections at AC/DC frame 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Fig. 2.178 Connection of DC and Battery Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Fig. 2.179 Routing of the Battery Breaker Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Fig. 2.180 Fitting of the fans, closing the AC/DC frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Fig. 2.181 Example of system cabling with semi-rigid cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Fig. 2.182 Example of system cabling with flexible cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Fig. 3.1 Example for Configuration Overview (BS-240) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

12 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

Tables
Tab. 2.1 Frame equipping variants, BS-240XL Base and Extension Racks . . . . 24
Tab. 2.2 Equipping variants, BS-240XL Service1 Rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Tab. 2.3 Equipping variants, BS-240XL Service2 Rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Tab. 2.4 Gap between Service2/1 and Service2/2 rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Tab. 2.5 Gap between Extension1and Extension2 rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Tab. 2.6 Gap between Base and Extension1 rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Tab. 2.7 Gap between Service2/1 and Service1 rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Tab. 2.8 Gap between Service1 and Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Tab. 2.9 Interrack-cables without extension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Tab. 2.10 Types of flexible conduit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Tab. 2.11 Pin Assignments of Abis interface PCM0, 75 Ω. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Tab. 2.12 Pin Assignments of Abis interface PCM1, 75 Ω. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Tab. 2.13 Pin Assignments of the PCM0 interface (SubD 25 connector) . . . . . . . 67
Tab. 2.14 Pin Assignments of the PCM1 interface (SubD 25 connector) . . . . . . . 68
Tab. 2.15 Pin Assignments of the monitoring interfaces PCM0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Tab. 2.16 Pin Assignments of the monitoring interfaces PCM1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Tab. 2.17 Pin Assignments ACTM Connector X1...X4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Tab. 2.18 Pin Assignments ACTM Connector X5...X8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Tab. 2.19 Pin Assignments ACTM Connector X9, X10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Tab. 2.20 OPEXAL10V1 Module 0 connection at ACTM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Tab. 2.21 OPEXAL10V1 Module 1 connection at ACTM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Tab. 2.22 Pin / Wire assignment EAP-cable 1 and 2 (Sub-37, female) . . . . . . . . . 81
Tab. 2.23 Wire / Terminal assignment EAP-cable 2 at ACTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Tab. 2.24 Wire / Terminal assignment EAP-cable 1 at ACTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Tab. 2.25 ACTC alarms for BS-240 rack types (not for BS-240XL). . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Tab. 2.26 ACTC alarms for BS-240 XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Tab. 2.27 ACTC alarms for BS-240 II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Tab. 2.28 ACTC alarms for BS-240XL II rack types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Tab. 2.29 ACTC-4 alarms for BS-240 II racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Tab. 2.30 ACTC-4 alarms for BS-240 II racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Tab. 2.31 Pin Assignments of the LMT interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Tab. 2.32 Pin Assignments of the LMT RJ45 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Tab. 2.33 Overview of backup battery sets (BS-240 / BS-240XL) . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Tab. 2.34 Overview of backup battery sets BS-240II / BS-240XL II) . . . . . . . . . . 109
Tab. 2.35 Selection of Slot ID (BS-240 / 240 XL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Tab. 2.36 List of battery cables between the racks (BS-240) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Tab. 2.37 List of battery cables between the racks (BS-240XL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Tab. 2.38 List of temp-resistor cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Tab. 2.39 List of battery cables between the racks of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A with
ADPAV3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Tab. 2.40 Battery sensor cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Tab. 2.41 Battery cables between the racks of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1)
126

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 13
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

Tab. 2.42 Battery sensor cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127


Tab. 2.43 List of DC cable connections between BS-240 racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Tab. 2.44 DC cable connections between the BS-240XL racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Tab. 2.45 DC cable connections between BS-240 II / 240XL II racks (S1A, ADPAV3)
132
Tab. 2.46 DC cable connections between BS-240 II / 240XL II racks (S1A, ADP-2V1)
133
Tab. 2.47 Cables for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3). . . . 134
Tab. 2.48 DC cabling for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1) 136
Tab. 2.49 Example for CAN-Bus cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Tab. 2.50 List of SELIC-cabling BS-240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Tab. 2.51 List of SELIC-cabling BS-240 II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Tab. 2.52 SELIC-cabling of BS-240XL and BS-240XL II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Tab. 2.53 Battery Cable Kits for Connection BS-240 with BS-240 II S2 Racks . . 143
Tab. 2.54 Overview of the Tempresistor Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Tab. 2.55 Battery Cables for BS-240XL Service1 with BS-240XL II Service2 Racks .
145
Tab. 2.56 Overview of the Tempresistor Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Tab. 2.57 Cables from Service1A to Base and Extension1/2 (S1A, ADPAV3) . . . 148
Tab. 2.58 Cables from Service1A to Base and Extension 1/2 (S1A, ADP-2V1) . . 149
Tab. 2.59 SELIC-cabling (mixed configuration without distance between cabinets). .
157
Tab. 2.60 SELIC-cabling (mixed configuration with distance between cabinets) . 157
Tab. 2.61 Pre-fabricated cables between OVPT/ABISCON and the microwave units
164
Tab. 2.62 Pin Assignments of -48 V interface of frame F:NT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Tab. 2.63 Pin Assignments of PCM-Input and -Output connector of frame F:NT . 167
Tab. 2.64 Module HW Code Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Tab. 2.65 Functionality of system cables BS-240 / 240 II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Tab. 2.66 Functionality of system cables BS-240XL / XL II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Tab. 2.67 BS-240 II / 240 XL II, flexible system cable types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Tab. 3.1 Technical Data of BS-240 / 240 II / 240XL / 240 XL II . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Tab. 3.2 Checklist for BS-240/240XL Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

14 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

1 Introduction
Important!
!
The CE declaration of conformity for the product will be fulfilled if the setup and cabling
is undertaken in accordance with the specification in the manual and the documentation
listed there, such as mounting instructions, cable lists etc. Where necessary, project-
specific documentation should be taken into account.
Deviations from the specifications or independent changes during setup, such as use of
cable types with lower screening values, for example, can lead to the CE requirements
being violated. In such cases the CE declaration of conformity is invalidated and the re-
sponsibility passes to the person who has caused the deviations.

The applying technical standards are listed in the “Guide to Documentation”


(Siemens document number A30808-X3247-K52-*-7635).

1.1 Purpose of the Manual


This document is intended to provide the information necessary for the installation of the
BS-240 / BS-240 II and BS-240XL / BS-240XL II in the SBS Base Station System (BSS).
It contains a description of all the necessary steps to install the BTS on site and integrate
it into the required infrastructure. The document includes information on the following:
– Equipment delivery
– Preliminary checks
– Unpacking the racks and devices
– Rack installation
in addition to information regarding the connection of the base station to:
– Power supply
– PCM - Network
– Site ground system
– Receive / transmit antenna system
– Alarm connections
– Mechanical and electrical connection of the racks
For installation of equipment not supplied by Siemens (battery chargers, antennas, pow-
er supplies, microwave etc.) refer to site specific documentation or vendor instructions
provided with other equipment.

1.2 Installation Prerequisites


It is required that the installer pays attention to all relevant national EMC standards.
– EMF standard relevant for the choice of the antenna, the placement of the antennas
and the max. output power of the BTS (cell coverage).
– Use the correct material as described in this manual.
– Installation according to the standards EN 50310 or ETS 300253, EN 50154 and the
hints in this manual.
– The other equipment on site must be CE designated and must provide interfaces for
connecting of external cables conformable to EMC instructions.
The installation staff should have a basic knowledge of the relevant standards. The in-
stallation manual must be available for staff on site.

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 15
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

1.3 Handling of the Modules


All boards and modules must be handled with extreme care as each one contains elec-
trostatically sensitive devices (ESD). The modules are marked with the ESD-label.

Fig. 1.1 ESD Symbol

These are sensitive to static discharge.


Notice:
– Avoid handling the modules in a high-static environment.
– When handling the modules, do not touch connector contacts.
– An ground high-impedance wrist strap must be worn when handling modules.
– Use the socket at the racks for wrist strap connection.
– The modules must be transported in appropriate packaging.

Fig. 1.2 ESD jack for wrist strap connection of BS-240 / 240XL

Fig. 1.3 ESD press-stud for wrist strap connection of BS-240 II / 240 XL II

16 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

2 Base Station Installation

2.1 Position in the System


The BS-240/240XL and BS-240 II / 240XL II interconnects the MS via the Um interface
with the trunk network via the Abis interface.

Um
interface

Abis Asub A
BTS BSC TRAU MSC
interface interface interface

Mobile SBS
Station

Fig. 2.1 Position of the Base Station within the SBS

2.2 Site Requirements


The installation site must fulfill installation rules according to ETS 300253 or EN 50310
and EN 50174.
The lightning protection measures must be in accordance with IEC 61312, IEC 61024
and IEC 61663 (in the future series IEC 62305-3 to IEC 62305-5) to achieve a lightning
protection zone 1 interface to the communication equipment.
With regard to explosion hazards, the installation room of the base transceiver station
with integral battery back-up system must be guarantee a continuous ventilation, to
keep the critical hydrogen concentration below 4% vol.
The cross section of the air inlet / outlet must be calculated in accordance to
IEC/EN50272-2.
The construction of the room in which the base transceiver station is to be housed must
be complete and the room in good condition and dry (the humidity must not exceed 60
%), heaters if necessary, should be placed inside the room.
The BS-240 / 240XL and BS-240 II / 240XL II are intended to be installed in an area with
restricted access.
It is important, that the installation site and the transportation route meets the valid floor
load requirements. If the floor load rating is unknown, be sure to find out with a building
engineer or another appropriate professional during the site acquisition.
Prior to the commencement of installation, the site must have been prepared as follows:
– The installing room should be free from possible water ingress, frost and excessive
insect attacks.
– Doors and windows must already have been installed and must be lockable.

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 17
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

– Openings in walls, ceiling or floor - if required - must be complete.


– Room lighting and wall outlets must have been installed.
– Heating or air-conditioning systems should be ready for operation.
– Walls and ceilings should have been painted. The room must be clean.
– A minimum floor space of 1,70 m x 1,50 m must be provided
(if later extension is not foreseen).
– Cable runways should be installed first.
– All installation works of 3 phase 230 V AC power supply, including the circuit break-
ers in the AC-distribution panel (mechanically coupled), must be finished.
To prevent subsequent accumulation of dust and dirt, the parts and equipment units to
be installed should be unpacked outside the room (if possible).
After that it is advantageous to install the BTS, after all other installation works to create
the required infrastructure (power supply, antenna cabling, PCM line...) are complete.

2.3 Site Configuration


Operation of the BS-240 / 240XL / 240 II / 240XL II requires additional equipment on site:

TX/RX antennas microwave outdoor unit *

external alarms**
PCM24/30 2 Mbit/s
3 x 230V/50Hz AC
(or -48 V DC)

AC-counter/
main breakers
in power distribution box

ground connection
*dependent on type of network integration
**optional

Fig. 2.2 Site configuration

2.4 Construction Overview of the BS-Types


The Base Station equipment of the BS-240 / 240 II is housed in racks with the dimen-
sions of 1600 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm (H x W x D). The Base rack and each optional
Extension rack can be equipped with up to 8 Carrier Units.
The Base rack and the Extension rack of the BS-240XL / 240XL II can be equipped with
up to 12 Carrier Units. The dimensions of a BS-240XL / 240 XL II rack are
2050 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm (H x W x D).

18 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

For a full-featured Base Station, the maximum number of TRX is limited to 24 with CUs
and 48 with the use of FCUs.
The necessary space for installation is shown in Fig. 2.20. Because of the flexible con-
figuration, several cable kits will be used for cable connections between the racks.
The first rack of Base Station is called Base rack and contains the following modules:
Generic Modules:
Core Basis (COBA): Essential components are the base core controller (BCC), the
advanced clock generation (ACLK), the carrier unit interfaces (CC-Link), the PCM30/24
Abis interfaces, the internal system alarm interface, the LMT interface and an interface
to one satellite (COSA) to expand the COBA.
The priority tasks of the module are the local controlling of the BTSE, the generating of
system clocks, providing all interfaces, routing data to the CU and handling and provid-
ing O&M messages.
Core Satellite (COSA): The task of the COSA is to expand the number of Abis interfac-
es and CC-links of the core. The essential components are the framing and line interface
(FALC) that provides the PCM30/24 port, the serial interface controller (SELIC) provid-
ing the CU-interface and the BUS-interface to the COBA. The COSA will be controlled
via a satellite interface by the COBA. To apply the feature cross connect, a COSA has
to be installed always into the base rack.
Alarm Collection Terminal (ACT): Collect all alarms for those units having no access
to the CAN-Bus and pass them via CAN-Bus interface to COBA.
Overvoltage Protection and Tracer (OVPT): Protects the PMC30 ports of core boards
from overvoltage and provides the monitoring interfaces for connected Abis-lines.
Abis Connection Module (ABISCON): Provides the interface between the base rack
and the peripheral Abis-cables. The ABISCON carries monitoring interfaces for connect-
ed Abis-lines and serves as interface for external synchronization clock.

Carrier related Modules:


Carrier Unit (CU): Consists of a receiving and transmitting part with synthesizer and
power amplifier, a signal processing unit as well as a power supply unit.
EDGE Carrier Unit (ECU): CU with supporting EDGE functionality in the up- and down
link.
Flex Carrier Unit (FCU): The FlexCU is a two-carrier unit and based on the ECU. The
FCU allows the expansion of the number of TRX per BTSE up to max. 48.
Antenna Combining Modules:
Duplexer Amplifier Multicoupler (DUAMCO): The DUAMCO consists of two identical
modules. Each module contains a duplex filter, that combines the TX and RX path to-
gether, to be fed a common antenna. If more than 2 carriers have to be combined to a
antenna system (with DUAMCO 2:2), a DUAMCO 4:2 or DUAMCO 8:2 has to be used.
Flexible Duplexer and Multicoupler (FDUAMCO): For each frequency band one type
of the FDUAMCO unit is available, that can be configurated with jumper cables for the
One-to-One mode (=DUAMCO 2.2) or Two-to-One mode (=DUAMCO 4:2). To provide
a DUAMCO 8:2 functionality, a COAMCO8 is required in addition to the
FDUAMCO.
Co-Duplexer and Multicoupler Extension (COAMCO8): The COAMCO8 is used with a
FDUAMCO together to provide a 8:2 configuration.

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 19
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

Filter Combiner (FICOM): One base module of the FICOM is needed per cell and is
able to combine the TX path of two carriers to one antenna. The base module can be
expanded with up to 3 expansion modules if more than 2 carriers should be combined
to one antenna. The expansion modules is able to combine 2 carriers in addition. In
maximum 8 carrier, that belongs to the same cell can be combined to one antenna.
DI-Amplifier Multicoupler (DIAMCO): The DIAMCO consists of two independend mod-
ules. Every module contains an RX-filter, a low noise amplifier (LNA), an attenuator, a
second LNA and a power splitter. The DIAMCO splits the RX antenna signal and can
drive up to 8 receiver inputs. Via the antenna feeder cable the DC power for the tower
mounted amplifier will be delivered by the DIAMCO.
High Power Duplexer (HPDU): The main task of the HPDU is to combine the TX- and
the RX-path to one antenna, in order to minimize the number of antennas if the FICOM
module is used.
For the Base Rack to function a Service Rack can be installed close to the Base Rack.
If only one Service Rack is located on site, it contains all infrastructure equipment:
AC/DC Converter (ACDC): Converts the AC mains voltage into the -48 Vdc supply volt-
age.
Link Equipment (LE): Can be NTPM, if terrestrial line is used for the connection to BSC
or microwave units.
Backup Batteries: Guarantees continuous operation for a certain time in case of mains
breakdown or AC/DC converter failure.

NOTE
i All empty slots in a partially equipped subrack must be closed with cover plates so that
the air flow inside the rack will not be affected.
Cover plates are not necessary for link equipment and empty battery trays.

2.4.1 Rack Configuration of different BS-Variants


The following rack types exist:
– Base rack: Contains the core modules, up to 8 carrier units (BS-240 / 240U II) or up
to 12 carrier units (BS240XL / 240XL II) and antenna combiners.
– Extension rack: Contains up to 8 carrier units (BS-240 / 240 II) or up to 12 carrier
units (BS240XL / 240XL II) and antenna combiners.
– Service1 rack (BS-240 / 240XL): Contains AC/DC converters, backup batteries and
link equipment in flexible configuration.
– Service1A rack (BS-240 II / 240XL II): Contains up to 6 AC/DC converters, an
AC/DC distribution panel with Alarm Collection Terminal, backup batteries and link
equipment in flexible configuration.
– Service2 rack (BS-240 / 240XL): Contains backup batteries and link equipment in
flexible configuration.
– Service2 rack (BS-240 II / 240XL II): Contains a DC-LE Breaker Panel with Alarm
Collection Terminal, backup batteries and link equipment in flexible configuration.
The minimum configuration for a BS-240 / 240 II with a maximum of 8 carrier units
requires a Base rack and a Service1 / Service1A rack (optional, not needed in the case
of -48 Vdc supply from external power supply equipment).
The serving of a site with the maximum number of carrier units (24) requires the Base
rack, 2 Extension racks and a Service1 / Service1A rack.

20 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

For extension of link equipment or battery backup, additional Service2 racks can be add-
ed.
The BS-240 / 240 II site can consists of up to a maximum of 8 racks (Base rack, 2 Ex-
tension racks, Service1/Service1A rack, maximum 4 Service2 racks).
The minimum configuration for a BS-240XL / 240XL II with maximum 12 carrier units
requires a Base rack and a Service1 / Service1A rack (optional, not needed in the case
of -48 Vdc supply from external power supply equipment).
The serving of a site with the max. number of carrier units (24) requires the Extension
rack. For extension of link equipment or battery backup time, additional Service2 racks
can be added.
The number of Service racks depends on the number of installed carriers on site, the
volume of required link equipment and the expected battery backup time.
The BS-240XL / 240XL II site can consists of a maximum of 7 racks (Base rack, Exten-
sion rack, Service1 rack / Service1A rack, maximum 4 Service2 racks).

2.4.1.1 Rack Configurations BS-240


Fig. 2.3 shows the an example of rack types, that are needed for a BS-240 site with up
to 16 carriers.

SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENS

DC-PANEL LMT DC-PANEL DC-PANEL


ETHERNET
ACT-C ACT-C ACT-C

ACOM ACOM ACOM ACOM ACOM ACOM ACOM ACOM


AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ #0 #1 #2 #3 #0 #1 #2 #3
DC DC DC DC DC DC DC
CTRL 00 01 02 03 04 05

AC + DC Distribution

LE 0
LE 1
MUCO #0

MUCO #0
MUCO #1

MUCO #1

LE 2
LE 3
CU CU CU CU CU CU CU CU
LE 4
#2 #3 #6 #7 #2 #3 #6 #7
LE 5
COBA 1
COBA 0

COSA 1
COSA 0

CU CU CU CU CU CU CU CU
#0 #1 #4 #5 #0 #1 #4 #5

Service1 Rack Base Rack Extension Rack

Fig. 2.3 Rack types of the BS-240

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 21
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENS

DC-PANEL DC-PANEL DC-PANEL DC-PANEL DC-PANEL


ACT-C ACT-C ACT-C ACT-C ACT-C

AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/AC/
DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC
CTRL 00 01 02 03 04 05 CTRL 00 01 02 03 04 05 CTRL 00 01 02 03 04 05 CTRL 00 01 02 03 04 05 CTRL00 01 02 03 04 05

AC + DC Distribution AC + DC Distribution AC + DC Distribution AC + DC Distribution AC + DC Distribution

LE 0 LE 0
LE 1 AC/AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/AC/ AC/AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/AC/ LE 1
LE 2 DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC LE 2
LE 3 CTRL 10 11 12 13 14 15 CTRL 10 11 12 13 14 15 LE 3
LE 4 LE 4
LE 5 AC + DC Distribution AC + DC Distribution
LE 5
LE 6
LE 7
LE 8
LE 0 LE 9
LE 1
LE 10
LE 2
LE 11
LE 3
LE 4
LE 5

Fig. 2.4 Service1 rack configurations of the BS-240

SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENS

DC-PANEL DC-PANEL DC-PANEL DC-PANEL


ACT-C ACT-C ACT-C ACT-C

LE 0 LE 0 LE 0
LE 1 LE 1 LE 1
LE 2 LE 2 LE 2
LE 3 LE 3 LE 3
LE 4 LE 4 LE 4
LE 5 LE 5 LE 5
LE 6
LE 7
LE 8 LE 0
LE 9 LE 1
LE 2
LE 10
LE 3
LE 11
LE 4
LE 5
LE 6
LE 7
LE 8
LE 9
LE 10
LE 11

Fig. 2.5 Service2 rack configurations of the BS-240

22 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

2.4.1.2 Rack Configurations of the BS-240 II


The site configuration of racks and the functionality of a BS-240 II is equal to the
BS-240. The rack layouts, are shown in the figure below (example of a 16 carrier site).

SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENS


SIEMENS

0V -48V

ACTC FAN#0 FAN#1 BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06BR07BR08


ACTC
BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06
ACTC
0V -48V 0V -48V
LE Panel (S2)

FAN#0 FAN#1 FAN#0 FAN#1 FAN#0 FAN#1

HU # 0 for LE ACOM ACOM ACOM ACOM ACOM ACOM ACOM ACOM


HU # 1 for LE #0 #1 #2 #3 #0 #1 #2 #3
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
LE
HU # 4 for LE AD Panel +-
180A
ACTC

HU # 5 for LE -48V X29


BR 33

B E1E2 B E1E2 0 1
- - - +++ + -

FAN#2 FAN#3 FAN#2 FAN#3


0V -48V

LE Panel (S1A)
160A

HU # 0 for LE

MUCO #0
MUCO #1
MUCO #0
MUCO #1
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 2 for LE CU CU CU CU CU CU CU CU
#2 #3 #6 #7 #2 #3 #6 #7
HU # 3 for LE
HU # 4 for LE
HU # 5 for LE FAN#4 FAN#5
FAN#4 FAN#5
160A

160A

COBA 1
COBA 0

COSA 1
COSA 0

CU CU CU CU CU CU CU CU
#0 #1 #4 #5 #0 #1 #4 #5

Service2 Rack Service1A Rack Base Rack Extension Rack

Note: CU can be Carrier Unit (CU) or EDGE Carrier Unit (ECU)

Fig. 2.6 Types of BS-240 II racks

2.4.1.3 Rack Configurations for BS-240XL


The following types of rack exist:
– Base rack (contains core modules, up to 12 carrier units and antenna combiners)
– Extension rack (contains up to 12 carrier units and antenna combiners)
– Service1 rack (contains AC/DC converters, backup batteries and link equipment in
flexible configuration)
– Service2 rack (contains backup batteries and link equipment in flexible configura-
tion)
Refer to Tab. 2.1, Tab. 2.2, Tab. 2.3 for a selection of rack configurations.

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 23
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENS

DC-PANEL DC-PANEL ETHERNET DC-PANEL DC-PANEL


ACT-C ACT-C LMT ACT-C ACT-C

FAN #0 FAN #1 FAN #0 FAN #1 FAN #0 FAN #1


LE #0
AC/ ACOM ACOM ACOM ACOM ACOM ACOM ACOM ACOM
LE #1
LE #2 DC AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ #0 #1 #2 #3 #0 #1 #2 #3
CTRL DC DC DC DC DC DC
LE #3 #00 #00 #01 #02 #03 #04 #05
LE #4
LE #5
LE #6 AC + DC DISTRIBUTION
LE #7
LE #8
LE #9 FAN #2 FAN #2 FAN #3 FAN #2 FAN #3
FAN #3
LE #10
LE #11
AC/
DC AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ CU CU CU CU

MUCO #3
MUCO #3

MUCO #2
MUCO #2
CU CU CU CU
CTRL DC DC DC DC DC DC
#4 #5 #10 #11 #4 #5 #10 #11
#01 #10 #11 #12 #13 #14 #15

AC + DC DISTRIBUTION

FAN #4 FAN #5 FAN #4 FAN #5

CU CU CU CU

MUCO #1
MUCO #0
MUCO #1
CU CU CU

MUCO #0
CU
#2 #3 #8 #9 #2 #3 #8 #9

1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4


Battery Battery Battery Battery

FAN #6 FAN #7 FAN #6 FAN #7

CU CU CU CU CU CU CU CU
#0 #1 COSA #0 #6 #7
COBA #1
COBA #0

COSA #1
#0 #1 #6 #7

1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4


Battery Battery Battery Battery

Service2 Rack Service1 Rack Base Rack Extension Rack


Note: CU can be Carrier Unit (CU) or EDGE Carrier Unit (ECU)

Fig. 2.7 Types of BS-240XL racks

frame no. installed modules Base Rack installed modules Extension rack

4 (top) 4 x DUAMCO 2:2 or 4 x DUAMCO 2:2 or


4 x DUAMCO 4:2 or 4 x DUAMCO 4:2 or
2 x DUAMCO 8:2 or 2 x DUAMCO 8:2 or
4 x FICOM modules 4 x FICOM modules
(Base/Expansion modules in (Base/Expansion modules in
site specific configuration) site specific configuration)
3 4 x CU or ECU 4 x CU or ECU
2 x DIAMCO 2 x DIAMCO
2 4 x CU or ECU 4 x CU or ECU
2 x DIAMCO 2 x DIAMCO
1 (down) 4 x CU or ECU 4 x CU or ECU
2 x COBA;
2 x COSA

Tab. 2.1 Frame equipping variants, BS-240XL Base and Extension Racks

24 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

Service1 rack

frame type 1 type 2 type 3 type 4 type 5


no.

4 (top) F:AC/DC1/1 F:AC/DC1/1 F:AC/DC1/1 F:AC/DC1/1 F:AC/DC1/1


2 2 2 2 2
3 F:LE F:LE F:AC/DC2 F:AC/DC2 F:AC/DC2
2 (6 x LE) F:BATTERY F:LE F:LE F:BATTERY
1 (down) F:BATTERY F:BATTERY (6 x LE) F:BATTERY F:BATTERY
DC up to 4000 W up to 8000 W
Output
Power

Tab. 2.2 Equipping variants, BS-240XL Service1 Rack

Service2 rack

frame no. type 1 type 2


(R:BS120) (R:BS120)

4 (top) F:LE F:LE


3 (6 x LE) F:BATTERY
2 F:BATTERY F:BATTERY
1 (down) F:BATTERY F:BATTERY

Tab. 2.3 Equipping variants, BS-240XL Service2 Rack

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 25
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

2.4.1.4 Rack Configurations for BS-240XL II


The rack layouts of the BS-240XL II are shown in the figure below (example of a
24 carrier site).

SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENS


0V -48V
FAN#0 FAN#1
ACTC ACTC ACTC
LE Panel (S2)

FAN#0 FAN#1 FAN#0 FAN#1 FAN#0 FAN#1

HU # 0 for LE
ACOM ACOM ACOM ACOM ACOM ACOM ACOM ACOM
HU # 1 for LE #0 #0 #1
#1 #2 #3 #2 #3
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
LE 180A

HU # 4 for LE AD Panel +-
ACTC

BR 33
HU # 5 for LE -48V X29
B E1E2 B E1E2 0 1
- - - +++ + -
FAN#2 FAN#3 FAN#2 FAN#3 FAN#2 FAN#3
0V -48V

HU # 6 for LE
LE Panel (S1A) CU CU CU CU CU CU CU CU

ACOM #5
HU # 7 for LE
HU # 8 for LE HU # 0 for LE #4 #5 #10 #11 #4 #5 #10 #11

HU # 9 for LE HU # 1 for LE
HU # 10 for LE HU # 2 for LE
HU # 11 for LE HU # 3 for LE
160A
160A

FAN#4 FAN#5 FAN#4 FAN#5

CU CU CU CU CU CU CU
CU

ACOM #4
#3 #8 #9 #2 #3 #8 #9
#2
160A

160A

FAN#6 FAN#7 FAN#6 FAN#7

CU CU CU CU CU CU CU CU
#0 #1 #6 #7
COSA #0
COBA #1
COBA #0

COSA #1

#0 #1 #6 #7

Service2 Rack Service1A Rack Base Rack Extension Rack

Note: CU can be Carrier Unit (CU), EDGE Carrier Unit (ECU)


or Flex Carrier Unit (FlexCU)

Fig. 2.8 Types of BS-240XL II Racks

26 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

2.5 Equipment Delivery

2.5.1 Preliminary Checks


A ShockwatchTM -label and a TIP (N) TELLTM-label are fixed at the rack surface in the
case of pallet transportation or at the crate for indication of fallover or strong shocks dur-
ing the transport from factory to the site.
If the TIP (N) TELLTM-label arrow is blue, the package has been on the side or tipped
over in transit. If the ShockwatchTM -label is red, the package has been shocked during
transport.
Check that the crate and label are proper condition. In case of evident damage due to
transport, unpack the equipment in presence of an insurance company representative
and promptly claim any damage and inform the shipper for specifying the damage.
Check whether the package is actually addressed to the site and complete.

ShockwatchTM -label

TiltwatchTM-label

Fig. 2.9 ShockwatchTM-label and TiltwatchTM-label

2.5.2 Rack mounted on a Pallet


Unpack the rack according to the following instructions and in accordance with
Fig. 2.10.
– Cut the two straps (1).
– Cut the protection foil along the cardboard corner reinforcement (2) and remove it.
– Remove the cardboard reinforcement on the top and from the corners of the rack.
– Unscrew the four fixing claws from the feet of the rack.
– Retain the claws for later floor fixing of the rack.
– Shift the rack carefully from the transportation pallet. A second person is needed for
help and to prevent the fallover of the rack.

WARNING
!
Safety gloves and goggles must be worn when cutting the straps. Pay attention to the
tension of the straps. Use only plate shears.

WARNING
!
Do not burn the package, as the burning packaging material may give off toxic gases.

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 27
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

The Service racks will be delivered without backup batteries (weight aspects).
Additional crates are used for transporting of the batteries.

Fig. 2.10 Rack mounted on the pallet

Fig. 2.11 Dismounting the rack from the pallet

2.5.3 Rack shipped in a Crate


The racks are shipped vertically in wooden crates (or horizontally in case of transporta-
tion by airplane).The crate dimensions for the BS-240 / 240 II are
1800 mm x 800 mm x 650 mm (HxWxD). Depending on the pre-installed modules in-
side the racks, the crate can weigh up to approx. 190 kg.
The crate dimensions for the BS-240XL / 240XL II are 2225 mm x 800 mm x 650 mm
(HxWxD).
The Service racks will be delivered without backup batteries (weight aspects).

28 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

Additional crates are used for transporting of the batteries.


All crates have the following information printed on them for identification of delivery:
– Customer order number
– Serial number of rack or other supplied equipment
– Destination
– Gross and net weight
– Overall dimensions (cm)
– Delivery papers
For transportation of the crates from the unloading area into the construction room use
handling aids (for example: fork-lift truck, goods elevator), a second person is needed
for help.
During the unpacking steps, great care must be taken to ensure that the rack is not
scratched or damaged in any way. Unpack the rack according to the following figures.

unscrew

cut

Fig. 2.12 Removal of the straps, opening of the top cover

WARNING
!
Safety gloves and goggles must be worn when cutting the straps.
Pay attention to the tension of the straps. Use only plate shears.

– Cut the three straps (see Fig. 2.12) and remove the 10 M4 screws on the top of the
crate (see Fig. 2.12).
– Remove the crates top cover.
– Take out the packing material protecting the rack (see Fig. 2.13).
– Remove the protection to the head and to the base of the rack.
– Open and remove the tubular PE-wrap protecting the rack (see Fig. 2.14).
– Take the rack out of the crate with the aid of the straps around the rack.
– Lift the rack in vertical position.

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 29
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

Fig. 2.13 Removal of the packing material

cut

Fig. 2.14 Opening of the PE-wrap, lifting straps around the rack

Immediately after unpacking the rack, inspect it for damage and report the extent of any
damage to the transportation company.

WARNING
!
The burning of packing material should be avoided, because packaging may give off
toxic gases.

2.5.4 Unpacking of Modules and Batteries


Proceed the unpacking of modules as follows:
– Open the carton with a suitable knife along the adhesive tape at the top.
– Take the PVC foil bag that contain the module out of the carton.
– Open the PVC protection bag carefully with the knife and take out the module.
Avoid the handling of the modules in high-static environmental. The packing material
should be preserved for possible re-packing in future.
The battery sets of the Service1/2 racks will be shipped in wooden crates, including a
plastic bag that contain cable sets, screws,washers and the connection plates.
Further the parts of the air vent system and the installation instruction.

30 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

cut

Fig. 2.15 Unpacking of the battery sets

– Cut the tension belts with a plate shear.


– Remove the top cover of the wooden crate.
– Take the batteries out of the crate using the battery handles.

2.5.5 Rack Installation


Prior to the commencement of rack installation, consult the site documentation to locate
the installation point of the Base Station, the PCM24/30 network termination, AC mains
or power supply unit (if -48Vdc will be provided from external equipment) and the access
of the antenna cables into the construction room.
After that check the proper installation of the earthing bar and the necessary cable run-
ways.
If the rack must be moved to the final installation position by crane and for later connec-
tion works, it is necessary to remove the top cover of the rack.
Proceed as follows:
– Open the rack-door and remove both screws in the upper part of the front of rack.
(see Fig. 2.16).
– Lift up the top cover and slide it back.
– Disconnect the green/yellow ground wire from the pin inside the top cover.

WARNING
!
Before opening the rack-door take measures to prevent the rack from falling over!
Note the accident prevention regulations when working with a fork lift truck or crane!
Don‘t remove the crane eyes after the crane transport is finished to guarantee the later
EMI-closeness of the rack!

If the racks stand side by side, they must be screwed together to one common unit with
one nut and screw M8x20 (part of MK:EMCRV1 for rack variant I or MK:EMCR-2V1 for
rack variant II). For this purpose the top cover has to be removed as shown in the figure
Fig. 2.16.

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 31
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

remove the screws

ground wire

Fig. 2.16 Removal of top cover for crane eye access

For BS-240 II/ BS-240XL II rack type proceed as follows:


– Open the rack-door (see Fig. 2.17): Slide down the protection cover (1), push the
button behind the cover (2) and flap out the handle (3).
– Turn the handle counterclockwise 90˚ (4).
– Slide the top cover 20 mm in front direction and lift it up (see Fig. 2.18).
– Disconnect the green/yellow ground wire from the pin inside the top cover.

3
4

2
1

Fig. 2.17 Opening of rack door

32 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

ground wire

Fig. 2.18 Removal of the top cover

65˚

60˚

BS-240 / 240XL BS-240 II / 240XL II

Fig. 2.19 Guideline for crane transport

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 33
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

2350 mm
minimum

*) distance
room height

to wall
450 mm
**) **)

1900 mm 600 mm

BS-240XL
750 mm

500 mm
BS-240 2200 mm

min. dimensions for 3-rack solution


1600 mm

2025 mm

*) distance
450 mm

to wall
**)
750 mm

1700 mm

450 mm min. dimensions for double rack solution


Note:
*) Minimum clearance rear to wall for:
BS-240 without earthquake kit close to wall
BS-240 XL without earthquake mounting kit: 50 mm
BS-240 XL with earthquake kit Siemens serial no. S30861-K2131-X: 400 mm
BS-240 II / 240XL II: 50 mm (without earthquake kit)
BS-240 II / 240XL II with earthquake kit Siemens serial no. S30861-K4119-X: 150 mm
Minimum clearance by back-to-back assembly for:
BS-240 II / 240XL II: 100 mm (without earthquake kit)
BS-240XL: 100 mm (without earthquake kit)
**) the distance between two racks, side by side must not exceed 1mm

Fig. 2.20 Space necessary for installation of Base Station rack variants

WARNING
!
The total weight of rack must not exceed 360 kg (BS-240 / 240 II) or 425 kg (BS-240XL
/ 240XL II) respectively when being lifted.
For determination the weight refer to section “Technical Data”.
Under no circumstances must the sets of batteries be inserted into the Service Racks
during transportation on site. The doors must be kept closed during transportation.

34 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

NOTE
i To prevent the racks from tipping over (product safety) they must be fixed either to a wall
(exepted in earthquake zones) or the floor.
The minimum distance from the rear of the rack to the wall must be considered. It is rec-
ommended to prepare the fixings before moving the rack to its final position.

The four fastening claws, delivered with the rack, can be used for floor fixing of the racks.

1 2

Fig. 2.21 Adjusting and fixing of the rack feet

Proceed as described in the list below:


– Check the correct vertical rack position, using the spirit level. If the position is incor-
rect, equalize the differences in the floor height by adjusting the rack feet (see
Fig. 2.21).
– Loosen the lock nut (1) and adjust the rack feet (2) for proper floor contact by using
the adjuster feet wrench.
– Push a claw (3) on each of the 4 rack feet and mark the drilling point on the floor.
– Remove the claws and drill the 4 holes and insert the 4 wall plugs (e.g. Fischer
S8GK) into the holes.
– Push the claws on the rack feet and fix them.
Alternatively the rack can be fastened to the wall. The rack has two right angle brackets
on its top rear for mounting to wall (Fig. 2.22, right side). Depending from the rack type,
the necessary minimum distance must be considered from rear of the rack to the wall
(see Fig. 2.20). An right dimensioned additional distance piece can be helpful therefor.

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 35
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

Fig. 2.22 Floor and wall mounting of the racks

WARNING
!
In earthquake zones, the fastening to wall is prohibited. Use the earthquake mounting
kit for securing to the floor.

2.5.5.1 Setup of Earthquake Mounting Kit for BS-240


For setup the earthquake mounting kit (S30861-K2086-X) proceed in steps as follows:
– Mark the positions of the drilling holes in accordance with Fig. 2.24.
– Drill the holes with 18 mm in diameter and a depth of 90 mm. Don‘t pre-drill the
holes!
– Produce an undercut of the drilling holes: drill the hole to stop and swivel the jack
hammer 3-5 times keeping stop to concrete.
– Clean out the drilling holes by a vacuum.
– Put steel plug (e.g. Fischer FZA 18x80 M10 I) into the inserting tool (e.g. Fischer
FZE 18) and hammer into each hole until the sleeve is flush with surface.
– Fit bolts M10 (1) with washer (2) through both holes of claw (3) and distance plate
(4). Drive the bolts into the steel plugs as fast as possible. Fix in this way all claws
for the rear side rack feeds first.
– Shift the racks to the correct position, so that each of the rear adjuster feet is placed
in the cutout of a claw.
– Push a claw on each of the front side feeds and fix them with bolts and washers. The
distance plates are not needed for the front side row.

36 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

1
2

2 x for rearside of rack 2x for frontside of rack


Fig. 2.23 Earthquake mounting kit

32,5

1085
1135
485
535
600
650
50
0

0
rear

Service1 Rack Base Rack

front
463

Fig. 2.24 Drilling sketch for earthquake mounting kit (2 racks)

2.5.5.2 Setup of Earthquake Mounting Kit for BS-240XL


For setup the earthquake mounting kit (S30861-K2131-X) proceed in steps as follows:
– Mark the positions of the drilling holes in accordance with Fig. 2.25.
– Drill the holes with 22 mm in diameter and a depth of 90 mm. Don‘t pre-drill the
holes!
– Produce an undercut of the drilling holes: drill the hole to stop and swivel the jack
hammer 3-5 times keeping stop to concrete.
– Clean out the drilling holes by a vacuum.
– Put steel plug (e.g. Fischer FZA 22x100 M12I) into the inserting tool (e.g. Fischer
FZE 22) and hammer into each hole until the sleeve is flush with surface.

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 37
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

rack length 600 mm


600 mm

rack depth 450 mm


423 mm 423 mm

335 mm

57,5 mm
diameter 22 mm

88,5 mm

Fig. 2.25 Drilling sketch for earthquake mounting kit (2 racks)

– Check the completeness of the mounting kit according to the following figure and re-
move the rear panel of the rack.

4 1
4

2 2
5
5

5 6
3 5
3

4
4

Fig. 2.26 Parts of the earthquake mounting kit for the BS-240XL

– Remount the adjuster feet, setup the 4 metal angles (1) and fix them with Allan screw
(6) as shown in Fig. 2.27.

38 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

1
6
1

Fig. 2.27 Mounting of Pos. 1

– Click spring nuts in the extrusions.


– Insert both stiffening parts (2).
– Move the stiffening parts to rear and lateral side to stop.

extrusion 6

6 2

4 3

Fig. 2.28 Mounting of stiffening parts (1)

– Slide in the filler plates (3).


– Fix each stiffening part with 12 Allan screws M6 (4).

3 6
4

5
5

Fig. 2.29 Mounting of stiffening parts (2)

– Fasten the rack to the steel plugs in the floor with 4 bolts M12 (5).

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 39
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

– Remove the 4 Allan screws (6). It is absolute necessary, that the edge pieces can
work free of strain in the case of earthquake.
– Mount again the rear panel.

NOTE
i The use of the earthquake mounting kit for BS-240XL requires a minimum clearance to
the wall of 400 mm.

NOTE
i For mounting the earthquake mounting kit in a service rack, first the battery tray has to
be remounted.applying to your system.

WARNING
!
Take measures to prevent the rack falling over during the removal of the adjuster feet
and mounting of the metal angles. A second person is needed for help! The rack door
stay must be locked in the open position using the door stay provided, whilst work is be-
ing performed inside the rack.

2.5.6 Setup of Earthquake Mounting Kit for BS-240 II / 240XL II


In areas with the possibility of earthquake use the mounting kit for Earthquake Zone 4
Rack (MK:EQ4RV2, S30861-K4119-X). The additional brackets improve the robustness
of the rack against earthquake shocks.
The mounting kit consists of the mechanical parts as shown in the figure below.

3 3

Fig. 2.30 Parts of the earthquake kit S3086-K4119-X

Fix the rack to the floor in accordance with Fig. 2.33 in steps as follows:
– Mark the positions of the drilling holes onto the floor.
– Drill holes at the marked points with 18 mm in diameter and a depth of 98 mm. Don‘t
pre-drill the holes!
– Produce an undercut of the drilling holes: drill the hole to stop and swivel the jack
hammer 3-5 times keeping stop to concrete.

40 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

– Clean out the drilling holes with a vacuum cleaner.


– Put dowels (3) (e.g. HILTI - M12*73 / 20) into the drilling holes and hammer them
until the sleeve is flush with surface (use an inserting tool, if available).
– Place the double claw (1) at its mounting position and fix it with the provided bolts at
the rear dowels (see Fig. 2.31).
– Tighten the bolts to a torque of 60 Nm.
– Shift the rack to the appropriate position, so that each of the rear rack feet is placed
in a cut-out of the double claw (Fig. 2.31).
– Open the rack door.
– Insert a claw (2) on each of the front feet and affix them with the M12 bolts to the
dowels in front of the rack (see Fig. 2.32).
– Tighten the connection to a torque of 60 Nm.

1 3

Fig. 2.31 Double claw for the rear feet in mounted position

2 2

Fig. 2.32 Claws for the front feet before mounting

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 41
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

wall

142.5
600

465
450
485
57.5
(sketch without scale, all measures in mm)
front side

Fig. 2.33 Drilling sketch for the earthquake mounting kit

42 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

2.5.7 Back-to-back Assembly


Back-to-back assembly means all configurations that are not lined up in a connected
row, but with distance between the sidewalls of racks. These configuration are accord-
ing to customer requirements.
The open cable channel for inter-rack cabling from one rack to the other one has to be
closed with an EMI shielded mechanical EMI-kit. In this conduit, the DC-cables, battery
cables and the temp.resistor cables will be routed from one rack to the other.
An U-profile bar above the conduit will be used for routing of the Selic-bus-cables and
CAN-bus-cable. The mechanical equipment and cables necessary for connecting the
racks are part of corresponding mounting kits.

NOTE
i Other configurations with up to 5 m distance are possible and have to be defined for
specific project. In this case additional mechanical support and sleeve equipment as
well as extended cables, described in the following tables, are necessary.

2500 mm

*) Minimum clearance for BS-240 II / 240 XL II / 240 XL


*)100 mm

1600 mm
750 mm

conduit
S30861-S2146-S

Fig. 2.34 Back-to-back configuration

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 43
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

450 mm
Z
max. 5 m

S30861-S2146-S
750 mm

conduit
profile bar

(Z- clearance of rear to wall, depend on rack type)

Fig. 2.35 Side-by-side configuration

S30861-S2146-S
conduit
Service1 Base Extension1 profile bar

2400 mm + 2 x Z
1500 mm

Extension2

(Z - clearance of rear to wall,


depend on rack type)

Fig. 2.36 Back-to-back configuration with Extension1 and Extension2

44 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

(Z- clearance of rear to wall, depend on rack type)


Service1 Base Extension1

2400 mm + 2 x Z
1500 mm
S30861-S2147-S
conduit
profile bar

Service2

Fig. 2.37 Back-to-back configuration with Service1 and Service2

Detailed information about the wall distances (Z) of the different Rack types is described
in the chapter 2.5.5 / Fig. 2.20.
Additional to the standard configurations of back-to-back assembly as shown in the fig-
ures of this section other configuration with distances up to 5 metres are possible.
In this case required components and extended cables have to be defined in accor-
dance to customers requirements depending on length of flexible conduit.
The following tables informs about the mechanical components and typical cables for
extension.Measure “X” is the length of the flexible conduit and means also the additional
cable length.
The relation between cables with Siemens code no. and cable no. is given in Tab. 2.9.

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 45
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

Service Service distance Service Service Base Extension Extension


2/3 2/2 “X” 2/1 1 1 2

S2/1-S2/2 S1-S2/2 S1-S2/3 E2-S2/2

DC cable Rack (33)+X

CAN-Bus cable Rack (249)+X

Battery cable Rack (110/3, (110/4,


111/3)+X 111/4)+X
Temp.resitor Rack 1) 1)
cable (112/3) (112/4)
conduit Rack 2)

1) max. distance of AC/DC frame 2,5 m otherwise use up to 5 m cable 112/4


2) type of flexible conduit see Tab.”Types of flexible conduit”

Tab. 2.4 Gap between Service2/1 and Service2/2 rack

Service Service Service Service Base Extension distance Extension


2/3 2/2 2/1 1 1 “X” 2

S2/2-E2 S2/1-E2 S1-E2 B-E2 E1-E2

DC cable Rack 1)
(36)+X
CAN-Bus cable Rack (249)+X (248)+X

Selic cable Rack 1)


(277,
278)+X
conduit Rack 2)

1) replace fix installed cable by extended cable (+X)


2) type of flexible conduit see Tab. ”Types of flexible conduit”

Tab. 2.5 Gap between Extension1and Extension2 rack

46 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

Service Service Service Base distance Exten- Exten-


2/2 2/1 1 X sion sion
1 2

S2/2-E1 S2/2-E2 S2/1-E1 S2/1-E2 S1-E1 S1-E2 B-E1 B-E2

DC cable Rack 1) 1)
(35)+X (36)+X
CAN-Bus cable Rack (249)+X (247)+X (248)+X (246)+X

Battery cable Rack 1) 1)


(277,278 (277,278
)+X )+X
conduit Rack 2)

1) Replace fix installed cables by extended cables (+X)


2) type of flexible conduit see Tab. ”Types of flexible conduit”

Tab. 2.6 Gap between Base and Extension1 rack

Service Service Service distance Service Base Exten- Exten-


2/3 2/2 2/1 X 1 sion sion
1 2

S2/2-E2 S2/1-E1 S2/1-E2 S1-S2/1 S1-S2/2 S1-S2/3

DC cable Rack 3)
(33)+X
CAN-Bus cable Rack (249)+X (247)+X (248)+X

Battery cable Rack (110/2+ (110/3+ (110/4+


111/2)+X 111/3)+X 111/4)+X
Temp.resistor cable Rack 1) 2) 2)
(112/2) (112/3) (112/3)
conduit Rack 4)

1) max. distance from AC/DC frame to battery 2,5 m, otherwise use cable 112/3
2) max. distance from AC/DC frame to battery 5,5 m, otherwise a special must be defined
3) Replace fix installed cables by extended cables (+X)
4) type of flexible conduit see Tab. ”Types of flexible conduit”

Tab. 2.7 Gap between Service2/1 and Service1 rack

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 47
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

Service Service Service Service distance Base Exten- Exten-


2/3 2/2 2/1 1 X sion sion
1 2

S2/2-E1 S2/2-E2 S2/1-E1 S2/1-E2 S1-B S1-E1 S1-E2

DC cable Rack 1) 1) 1)
(34)+X (35)+X (36)+X
CAN-Bus cable Rack (249)+X (247)+X (248)+X (245)+X (246)+X

conduit Rack 2)

1) Replace fix installed cables by extended cables (+X)


2) type of flexible conduit see Tab. ”Types of flexible conduit”

Tab. 2.8 Gap between Service1 and Base

The following cables with Siemens code no. are typical cables for interrack-cabling with-
out extension.

cable code no. Siemens code no.

110/2, 111/2 S30864-X211-A47


110/3, 111/3 S30864-X211-A48
110/4, 111/4 S30864-X211-A49
112/2 S30864-X211-A44
112/3 S30864-X211-A45
33 Component of S30864-X211-A29
34 Component of S30864-X211-A29
35 Component of S30864-X211-A29
36 Component of S30864-X211-A29
245 S30864-X210-A11
246 S30864-X210-A12
247 S30864-X210-A13
248 S30864-X210-A14
249 S30864-X210-A15
277 S30864-X210-A2
278 S30864-X210-A2

Tab. 2.9 Interrack-cables without extension

The cables 33-36 are fix installed in the Service1 rack and have to be replaced by ex-
tended according to back-to-back configuration. The installation requires the temporary
removal of the plate, located at the top of EMI-panel.

48 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

flexible conduit Siemens code no.

type 1 (distance 0,625 m - 2,40 m) C50324-Z200-C22


type 2 (distance 1,25 m - 5,00 m) C50324-Z200-C21

Tab. 2.10 Types of flexible conduit

NOTE
i Grounding connections to extended racks are required by separate connections from
external grounding bar!

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 49
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

2.6 External Cabling Activities

2.6.1 Overview
This chapter provides the information required for installing the external cables between
the Base Station and the infrastructure equipment on site.
The rack cannot function without the following cable connections:
– In case of an AC power supply: AC mains terminal block 5 pole - power distribution
panel of 230 Vac, 3-phase supply
– By using of an DC power supply: DC mains terminal block 2 pole - power distribution
panel of -48Vdc
– Ground bolts -> ground bar
– Abis interface -> NTPM (in case of transmission via terrestrial lines)
– Abis interface -> Microwave indoor units (if W equipment is used o f r transmission)
– Microwave indoor units -> Microwave antennas
– Transmit / receive antenna connectors - antenna system
– Ground strip of antenna cable shields - ground bar
optional:
– Serial interface - signalling link terminal
– Alarm collection terminal - external alarm sensors
All interfaces excepted the antenna connectors are located at the EMI panel below the
top rack cover.
For cable installation the top cover has to be removed. For lift-up remove the bolts in the
top extrusions.

ground bolts

Ext.1 CU 4...7
OVPT0 OVPT1 CAN OUT -48 V
Ext.1 CU 0...3
Ext.2 CU 4...7 CAN TEST Serial IF
Ext.2 CU 0...4
LPA
MSU

PE-Plate ACTM

Fig. 2.38 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 Base Rack

50 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

ground bolts

CU 4...7
CAN OUT CAN IN
CU 0...3
CAN TEST LPA

MSU

PE-Plate

Fig. 2.39 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 Extension Rack

ground bolts

CAN OUT CAN IN

CAN TEST LPA


MSU

PE-Plate

Fig. 2.40 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240/240XL Service1Rack

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 51
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

ground bolts

CAN OUT CAN IN

CAN TEST LPA

PE-Plate

Fig. 2.41 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240/240XL Service2 Rack

ground bolts

Ext.1 CU 8...11
OVPT0 OVPT1 CAN OUT -48 V
Ext.1 CU 4...7
Ext.1 CU 0...3 CAN TEST Serial IF
LPA
MSU

PE-Plate ACTM

Fig. 2.42 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL Base Rack

52 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

ground bolts

CU 8...11
CAN OUT CAN IN
CU 4...7
CU 0...3 CAN TEST LPA

MSU

PE-Plate

Fig. 2.43 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL Extension Rack

ground bolts

CAN IN -48 V
OVPT0 OVPT1
CAN OUT Serial IF

CAN TEST LPA

MSU

PE-bolts
ACTM

Ext.1 CU 4...7
Ext.1 CU 0...3
Ext.2 CU 4...7
Ext.2 CU 0...3

Fig. 2.44 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 II Base Rack

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 53
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

ground bolts

CAN IN

CAN OUT

CAN TEST LPA

MSU
PE-bolts

CU 4...7
CU 0...3

Fig. 2.45 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 II Extension Rack

ground bolts

CAN IN

CAN OUT

CAN TEST LPA

PE-bolts

MSU

Fig. 2.46 Interfaces on the EMI-Panel of the BS-240 II/240XL II Service1 Rack

54 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

ground bolts

CAN IN

CAN OUT

CAN TEST LPA

PE-bolts

Fig. 2.47 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 II /240XL II Service2 Rack

ground bolts

CAN IN -48 V
OVPT0 OVPT1
CAN OUT Serial IF

CAN TEST LPA

MSU

PE-bolts
ACTM

Ext.1 CU 8...11
Ext.1 CU 4...7
Ext.1 CU 0...3

Fig. 2.48 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL II Base Rack

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 55
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

ground bolts

CAN IN -48 V

CAN OUT

CAN TEST LPA

MSU

PE-bolts

CU 8...11
CU 4...7
CU 0...3

Fig. 2.49 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL II Extension Rack

Some additional hints for the installation of external cabling:


– The first cable that has to be installed is the ground cable between the main ground
bolt on top of the rack and the nearest ground bar on site.
– The second installation step is to connect the ground bolts of the different racks in
series.
– After that all other cables e.g. AC mains, RF cabling or alarm wires can be installed.
– The screen of the RF jumpers has to be grounded before entering the BTSE via the
cable feeding module, see Fig. 2.88.
– If cables are fed through coaxial cable access located at the top of the rack at the
front, the screen has to be grounded like all other coaxial cables.
The following figure shows the location of the external interfaces of the BS-240/240XL
(example of BS-240 with Service1-, Base- and Extension rack).

56 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

serial interface cable


external alarms / commands
Abis lines (OVPT PCM0, PCM1)
antenna cables

3 x 230 Vac ** -48 Vdc*


ground cable
microwave
SIEMENS SIEMENS SIEMENS

LMT DC-PANEL LMT DC-PANEL LMT DC-PANEL


ETHERNET ETHERNET ETHERNET
ACT-C ACT-C ACT-C

ACOM ACOM ACOM ACOM ACOM ACOM ACOM ACOM


AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ AC/ #0 #1 #2 #3 #0 #1 #2 #3
DC DC DC DC DC DC DC
CTRL
#0 #0 #1 #2 #3 #4 #5
AC + DC Distribution

LE 0
LE 1
MUCO #0

MUCO #0
MUCO #1

MUCO #1
LE 2
LE 3
CU CU CU CU CU CU CU CU
LE 4
#2 #3 #6 #7 #2 #3 #6 #7
LE 5
COBA 1
COBA 0

COSA 1
COSA 0

CU CU CU CU
CU CU CU CU #0 #1 #4 #5
#0 #1 #4 #5

Service1 rack Base rack Extension rack


*) only used if an external DC-power supply is available
**) if an external 3 x 230 V ac power supply source will be used

Fig. 2.50 Locations of the connectors for external cables

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 57
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

2.6.2 Ground and AC- Power Supply Connections


The racks have to be connected to the site specific ground system before starting the
connection of AC mains cable.
An external ground wire (16 mm2, copper conductor) has to be connected on the upper
left side grounding bolt of the rack which must be attached to the ground bar on site. All
adjoining racks will be grounded using a prefabricated wire bridge and is connected to
top left and right corners of each rack respectively.
If on site a main ground wire (50 mm2, copper conductor) is installed, it is possible to
connect each rack on the shortest way to the main ground using 16 mm2 copper wires.
Connect the racks to the ground system as follows:
– Use the nearest ground bar on site.
– Measure the distances between the connection points of the ground system and the
ground bolt of the rack.
– Cut the cables to the required length.
– Remove the cable covering at the end to connect to the ground bolt (length approx.
15 mm) and mount the cable lug M8.
– Connect the prepared cable end to the ground bolt.
– Firmly tighten the nut.

alternative solution for rack grounding 50 mm2 main ground wire


16 mm 2ground wires

ground wire bridges

H07-RN F 5 G41)
AC distribution
AC counter
3 x 25 A main breakers2)
3 x 32 A main breakers3)

3 x 230 Vac mains


connection to ground

1) cross section needed depend on the cable length between external breaker and MSU
2) BS-241, BS-240, BS-240XL
3) BS-241 II, BS-240 II, BS-240XL II

Fig. 2.51 Ground and AC mains connections (example)

WARNING
!
Note, that the connection by screws at the top of racks standing side by side is a me-
chanical connection only. These connection is not a ground connection!

The figure above shows the recommended cabling for the power supply and ground
connections. The recommended cable types guarantees the proper function of the base
stations, equipped with up to 24 carriers.

58 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

An easily accessible disconnect device is incorporated into the AC mains supply wiring.
To isolate the mains supply, a circuit breaker has to be fitted in each phase inside the
AC distribution box close to the base station (see Fig. 2.51). The disconnect devices
shall simultaneously interrupt all phase conductors.
A 5-pole terminal block of the MSU, located in the top of Service1 / Service1A rack, is
the connection point for the AC mains cable.
The base station will be powered by 3 x 230 V, 50 Hz, 20 A per phase.

PE L3 L2 L1 N

Fig. 2.52 Wiring example of the 230 Vac terminal block (BS-240 Service1 Rack)

This warning must appear in the original German text:


Vor Anschluß des 3 x 230 V Einspeisungskabels ist sicherzustellen, daß das Kabel
spannungsfrei ist. Die Hauptsicherungen sind zu unterbrechen. Es sind geeignete
Maßnahmen gegen unbefugtes Einschalten der Netzspannung zu treffen.
An imprint, located on the front panel of the AC frame gives instruction how to deener-
gize the base station:
To deenergize entire unit:
1. “Switch OFF BATT 0 + BATT 1(BR14 + BR15) to deenergise DC circuit”
2. “Switch OFF breakers (BR11 + BR12 + BR13) to deenergise AC circuit”
To connect the BS240/240XL with the AC mains connection point perform the following
steps:
– Remove the bolts in the top extrusions to loosen the roof.
– Lift-up the roof sections carefully, to avoid damages of the paint coat.
– Refer to the site documentation for information about type and location of the AC dis-
tribution.
– Measure the distance between terminal block of the MSU and AC distribution.

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 59
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

– Cut the cable to the required length.


– Make sure that the protection earth wire (PE) is approx. 2 cm longer as the phase
conductors and the N-wire.
– Remove the insulation of the cable and cut back the wire insulation at the end, that
is to be connected to the terminal block.
– Fix the cable at the strain relief with cable ties.
– Insert the wires into the terminals. Use a screwdriver for opening the terminal
springs. Check that all wires are in fixed position.

2.6.3 Ground and DC- Power Supply Connections


For connecting the base station with an external -48 Vdc power supply unit a
Service1/Sevice1A Rack is not needed.
Depending on the site-specific power supply configuration, the racks have to be con-
nected directly with the power supply unit or via a power distribution panel.
The following figure shows the power supply configuration for the BTS, including a pow-
er distribution panel.
The power supply unit, as shown in Fig. 2.53, is intended to be supplied by a -48 Vdc
centralized battery source. The charging rectifiers must be internally insulated from the
AC mains by insulating transformers.
The positive pole of the backup batteries has to be connected to ground.

alternative solution for rack grounding main ground wire 50 mm2

DC main wires
2
2 x H 07 V-R 16 mm *) ground wire
2
2 H 07 V-R 16 mm
2 x H 07 V-R 35 mm **)***) (yellow/green)

main breaker
- ground
UE -48 V DC + wires
2 optional
H 07 V-R 35 mm power distribution
power supply panel
unit
fuse per rack:
50 A *)
80 A **)
100 A ***)
DC supply +0 V pole
connected to ground

backup ground bar


batteries
battery +0 V pole *) BS-240 / Service2 50 mm
2
connected to ground **) BS-240XL / BS-240 II
***) BS-240XL II

Fig. 2.53 Ground- and power supply connections with -48V DC

60 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

Installation of the DC wires is as follows:


– Measure the distance between rack and the power supply unit or power distribution
panel.
– Cut the wires to the required length.
– Remove the cable insulation (length approx. 12 mm) at the ends to be connected to
the terminal block of the MSU (the location is shown in Fig. 2.54).
– Insert the prepared ends into the terminal block.
– Pay attention to the correct polarity of the connection from BTS to the DC output of
the power supply unit.

-48 V +0 V

Fig. 2.54 Terminal block for -48 V DC input of MSU (BS-240)

For installation of the ground connection proceed as described in section 2.6.2 of this
manual.

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 61
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

2.6.4 Abis-Interface - PCM Link Terminal


The Abis interfaces PCM0 and PCM1, located on the EMI panel, provides the commu-
nication links to the neighboring Base Stations or to the controlling BSC.
The Abis interfaces can be terminated with an ABISCON (without Overvoltage Protec-
tion for indoor applications) or with an optional Overvoltage Protections (OVPT) which
protects the boards inside the rack against overvoltage (residual voltage < 1 kV).
Two types of ABISCON/OVPT exist:
– ABISCON/OVPT for 120 Ω cables (balanced)
– ABISCONCX/OVPTCOAX for 75 Ω cables (coaxial)

NOTE
i If the connection point for the Abis line (e.g., NTPM or microwave equipment) is outside
the building where the BTSE is installed, an OVPT module has to be installed always.

Depending on the different cable impedances it is recommended to use:


– Screened cable containing 8/10 shielded twisted pairs 0,25 mm2 for 100/120 Ω PCM
lines, e.g. S-09YS(ST)CY 8x2x0.6/1.2.
– Coaxial cables for 75 Ω wiring, e.g. 2YCCY 0.4/2.5.

NOTE
i Use only twisted pair or coaxial copper cables with braided shielding!
If cables should be used without shielded twisted pairs, do not route up-link and down-
link PCM lines in one common cable.

The maximum cable length depends on the attenuation of the cable, in order to fulfill the
requirements of minimum voltage levels to be provided at Abis interface according to
PCM standards.
The cable shielding must be connected to the relevant ground pins as close as possible
(in order to avoid EMC/RF interfering effects).

2.6.4.1 Abis-Interface for 120 Ohm Cable Impedance


Before starting the connection of the PCM cables at the Abis interface of the OVPT or
the ABISCON, prepare the cables as shown in the figure below.

1 2 3 4 5

Fig. 2.55 Preparation of a PCM-cable, 120 Ω impedance

62 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

– Cut the cable to the required length (1).


– Cut back the outer insulation approx.13 cm (2).
– Remove approx. 11 cm of the braided shield (3).
– Cut around the outer insulation and shift the insulation ring to the end of the braided
shield (4).Remove the foil shields and the additional plastic wires.
– Remove 6 mm of the wires insulation.
– Wrap the exposed cable screen, that will be attached at the stress relieving bracket.

NOTE
i If screen-clamps should be used, the outer diameter of the PCM cable must not exceed
8 mm. The terminal block of the OVPT/ABISCON allows the connection of wires with a
cross-section range between 0.08 mm2 and 2,5 mm2 (#28 - #12 AWG).

Fig. 2.56 Fastening of PCM cables at OVPT / ABISCON (120 Ω)

– Fix the cable at the stress-relieving by straps or screw down the screen clamps.
– Insert the wires into the terminals of the OVPT / ABISCON.
– Insert the additional wire (shielding potential) into one of the ground terminals (e.g.
no. 24).
– Lead the additional wire and the uplink and downlink wires on the shortest route
(that means without sleeves) between the stress relieving and the screw terminals.
– All unconnected PCM lines (4 wires per line) must be connected to one of the ground
terminals.

NOTE
i The ABISCON / OVPT boards have delicate 1,0/2,3 connectors and monitoring inter-
face connectors.
Please make sure that the wires and cables at these connectors are not under mechan-
ical tension - use suitable stress relief measures!

The pin assignments of the ABISCON is equal to the pin assignments of the OVPT and
shown in the following figures.

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 63
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

EXT SYNC A
EXT SYNC B
Down Link = RX

B A B A B A B A

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28

B A B A B A B A
PCM 4 PCM 3 PCM 2 PCM 1

Up Link = TX

Fig. 2.57 Abis interface PCM0 Pin Assignment, 120 Ohm

Down Link = RX

B A B A B A B A

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28

B A B A B A B A
PCM 8 PCM 7 PCM 6 PCM 5

Up Link = TX

Fig. 2.58 Abis interface PCM1 Pin Assignment, 120 Ohm

64 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

2.6.4.2 Abis-Interface with ABISCONCX / OVPTCOAX 75 Ohm


The Abis interface to the peripheral link equipment is done by use of 9 1,0/2,3 coaxial
connectors, located at the ABISCONCX or at the OVPTCOAX (shown in Fig. 2.59).

holes for stress relieving

PCM line
connectors

Fig. 2.59 OVPTCOAX with 1,0/2,3 coaxial connectors, 75 Ω

For Abis cabling with 75 Ω impedance use coaxial cable e.g. 2YCCY 0.4/2.5.
The coaxial cables will be prepared as follows:
– Fix a 1,0/2,3-female connector for each PCM-up and down line at the end to be con-
nected to the ABISCONCX / OVPTCOAX.
– Connect the prepared cable to the matching connectors.
– Use a torque spanner for 1,0/2,3 connector (35 Ncm).
– Fix the cables at the holes for stress-relieving with cable ties.

NOTE
i The ABISCON / OVPT boards have delicate 1,0/2,3 coaxial connectors. Make sure that
the wires and cables at these connectors are not fixed under mechanical tension - use
suitable stress relief measures!

signal coax connector signal coax connector

PCM1-ULA 1 PCM3-DLA 6
PCM1-DLA 2 PCM4-ULA 7
PCM2-ULA 3 PCM4-DLA 8
PCM2-DLA 4 EXTSYNCA 9
PCM3-ULA 5 --- ---

Tab. 2.11 Pin Assignments of Abis interface PCM0, 75 Ω

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 65
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

signal coax connector signal coax connector

PCM5-ULA 1 PCM7-DLA 6
PCM5-DLA 2 PCM8-ULA 7
PCM6-ULA 3 PCM8-DLA 8
PCM6-DLA 4 --- 9
PCM7-ULA 5 --- ---

Tab. 2.12 Pin Assignments of Abis interface PCM1, 75 Ω

66 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

2.6.4.3 Abis-Interface without ABISCON / OVPT


Without the ABISCON / OVPT, if these function is not needed, a SUB-D25 female con-
nector is the direct interface for the PCM links.

NOTE
i Without OVPT no monitoring possibility is provided.

Pin no. SubD 25 Signal name Function

1 PCM 1 - ULA PCM Line 1 Up Link A


14 PCM 1 - ULB PCM Line 1 Up Link B
3 GND/G shield pair 1
2 PCM 1 - DLA PCM Line 1 Down Link A
15 PCM 1 - DLB PCM Line 1 Down Link B
3 GND/G shield pair 2
4 PCM 2 - ULA PCM Line 2 Up Link A
16 PCM 2 - ULB PCM Line 2 Up Link B
18 GND/G shield pair 3
5 PCM 2 - DLA PCM Line 2 Down Link A
17 PCM 2 - DLB PCM Line 2 Down Link B
18 GND/G shield pair 4
6 PCM 3 - ULA PCM Line 3 Up Link A
19 PCM 3 - ULB PCM Line 3 Up Link B
8 GND/G shield pair 5
7 PCM 3 - DLA PCM Line 3 Down Link A
20 PCM 3 - DLB PCM Line 3 Down Link B
8 GND/G shield pair 6
9 PCM 4 - ULA PCM Line 4 Up Link A
21 PCM 4 - ULB PCM Line 4 Up Link B
11 GND/G shield pair 7
10 PCM 4 - DLA PCM Line 4 Down Link A
22 PCM 4 - DLB PCM Line 4 Down Link B
23 GND/G shield pair 8
12 EXTSYNCA
24 EXTSYNCB
25 GND/G
13 GND/G main cable shield

Tab. 2.13 Pin Assignments of the PCM0 interface (SubD 25 connector)

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 67
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

Pin no. SubD 25 Signal name Function

1 PCM 5 - ULA PCM Line 5 Up Link A


14 PCM 5- ULB PCM Line 5 Up Link B
3 GND/G shield pair 1
2 PCM 5 - DLA PCM Line 5 Down Link A
15 PCM 5 - DLB PCM Line 5Down Link B
3 GND/G shield pair 2
4 PCM 6 - ULA PCM Line 6 Up Link A
16 PCM 6 - ULB PCM Line 6 Up Link B
18 GND/G shield pair 3
5 PCM 6 - DLA PCM Line 6 Down Link A
17 PCM 6 - DLB PCM Line 6 Down Link B
18 GND/G shield pair 4
6 PCM 7 - ULA PCM Line 7 Up Link A
19 PCM 7 - ULB PCM Line 7 Up Link B
8 GND/G shield pair 5
7 PCM 7 - DLA PCM Line 7 Down Link A
20 PCM 7 - DLB PCM Line 7 Down Link B
8 GND/G shield pair 6
9 PCM 8 - ULA PCM Line 8 Up Link A
21 PCM 8 - ULB PCM Line 8 Up Link B
11 GND/G shield pair 7
10 PCM 8 - DLA PCM Line 8 Down Link A
22 PCM 8 - DLB PCM Line 8 Down Link B
23 GND/G shield pair 8
12 ---
24 ---
25 GND/G
13 GND/G main cable shield

Tab. 2.14 Pin Assignments of the PCM1 interface (SubD 25 connector)

68 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

2.6.4.4 Monitoring Interfaces of ABISCON and OVPT


The ABISCON / OVPT provides 3 6pin DIN41616 test connectors for monitoring the
PCM lines.
The following tables show the pin assignment for the monitoring interfaces. The pin ar-
rangement is shown in figure below.

6 5
connector 3
4 3
2 1

6 5
connector 2
4 3
2 1

6 5
connector 1
4 3
2 1

Fig. 2.60 Monitoring interfaces for PCM lines of ABISCON / OVPT

connector / pin Signal name connector / pin Signal name

1- 1 PCM 1 - ULA 2- 4 PCM 3 - ULB


1- 2 PCM 1 - ULB 2- 5 PCM 3 - DLA
1- 3 PCM 1 - DLA 2- 6 PCM 3 - DLB
1- 4 PCM 1 - DLB 3- 1 PCM 4 - ULA
1- 5 PCM 2 - ULA 3- 2 PCM 4 - ULB
1- 6 PCM 2 - ULB 3- 3 PCM 4- DLA
2- 1 PCM 2 - DLA 3- 4 PCM 4- DLB
2- 2 PCM 2 - DLB 3- 5 EXTSYNCA
2- 3 PCM 3 - ULA 3- 6 EXTSYNCB

Tab. 2.15 Pin Assignments of the monitoring interfaces PCM0

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 69
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

connector / pin Signal name connector / pin Signal name

1- 1 PCM 5 - ULA 2- 4 PCM 7 - ULB


1- 2 PCM 5 - ULB 2- 5 PCM 7 - DLA
1- 3 PCM 5 - DLA 2- 6 PCM 7 - DLB
1- 4 PCM 5 - DLB 3- 1 PCM 8 - ULA
1- 5 PCM 6 - ULA 3- 2 PCM 8 - ULB
1- 6 PCM 6 - ULB 3- 3 PCM 8 - DLA
2- 1 PCM 6 - DLA 3- 4 PCM 8 - DLB
2- 2 PCM 6 - DLB 3- 5 EXTSYNCA
2- 3 PCM 7 - ULA 3- 6 EXTSYNCB

Tab. 2.16 Pin Assignments of the monitoring interfaces PCM1

70 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

2.6.5 Alarm Collection Terminal - external Alarm Sensors


The access for cabling from external alarm sensors on site is the Alarm Collection Ter-
minal for Base Rack (ACTM).
The ACTM provides 8 spring terminal blocks with 12 pins each for connecting of 48 ex-
ternal alarm sensors. Each terminal block allows the connection of wires with a cross-
section in the range between 0,08 mm2 and 0,5 mm2 (#28 - #20 AWG).
The spring terminals are labelled X1 ... X10, the terminal blocks X1...X8 are used for
connection of external alarm sensors. At the terminal blocks X9 and X10 can be con-
nected up to 8 different electrical consumers (e.g. relays). All cables will be attached to
the stress relieving bracket as shown in the figure below.
The following tables give information on the wiring of the terminals.

NOTE
i For connection of external alarm sensors use cables with braided shield only.
Remove the outer insulation as shown in Fig. 2.55 for proper ground contact of the ca-
ble screen to the stress relieving bracket.

1 X4 12 1 X3 12 1 X2 12 1 X1 12
8

X9 1
8
X10 1

12 1 12 1 12 1 12 1

X8 X7 X6 X5

Fig. 2.61 ACTM terminal numbering

Pin no. Signal name Signal name Signal name Signal name
X1 X2 X3 X4

2, 4, 6, 8,10, 12 GND GND GND GND


1 AL42P AL36P AL30P AL24P
3 AL43P AL37P AL31P AL25P
5 AL44P AL38P AL32P AL26P
7 AL45P AL39P AL33P AL27P
9 AL46P AL40P AL34P AL28P
11 AL47P AL41P AL35P AL29P

Tab. 2.17 Pin Assignments ACTM Connector X1...X4

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 71
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

Pin no. Signal name Signal name Signal name Signal name
X5 X6 X7 X8

2, 4, 6, 8,10, 12 GND GND GND GND


1 AL0P AL6P AL12P AL18P
3 AL1P AL7P AL13P AL19P
5 AL2P AL8P AL14P AL20P
7 AL3P AL9P AL15P AL21P
9 AL4P AL10P AL16P AL22P
11 AL5P AL11P AL17P AL23P

Tab. 2.18 Pin Assignments ACTM Connector X5...X8

NOTE
i The signal source of the command outputs on the X1...X8 clamping blocks must be a
switching contact. The resistance of the contacts in closed position must be lower than
100 Ohm.
It is not allowed to connect a voltage source to the alarm inputs.
The connection of alarm sensors located outside the building requires the installation of
the MK:OPEXAL which protects the ACTM against over-voltage.

The ACTM provides at the connectors X9 and X10 the possibility to connect up to 8 relay
contacts (e.g. relays with default contact open).

NOTE
i The switched current must not exceed 100 mAAC/DC (contact closed) and the maximum
switched voltage is limited to 150 VAC or 125 VDC (contact open).
The maximum switching power is 10 W.

Pin no. X9 Signal name Pin no. X10 Signal name

1 CMD4_P 1 CMD0_P
2 CMD4_M 2 CMD0_M
3 CMD5_P 3 CMD1_P
4 CMD5_M 4 CMD1_M
5 CMD6_P 5 CMD2_P
6 CMD6_M 6 CMD2_M
7 CMD7_P 7 CMD3_P
8 CMD7_M 8 CMD3_M

Tab. 2.19 Pin Assignments ACTM Connector X9, X10

72 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

2.6.6 Installation of the Mounting Kit OPEXAL


If external alarm sensors are placed outside the building, the MK:OPEXAL (Overvoltage
Protection for external Alarms) is required.
Each MK:OPEXAL protects up to 10 alarm lines which are connected to the ACTM
against over-voltage.
Install the MK:OPEXAL in accordance to the following figures.

screw, dowel and washers 6 mm

ground wire
OPEXAL

cable ties

10 symmetric pair
cables

Fig. 2.62 Contents of the MK:OPEXAL

– Drill two holes with 6 mm in diameter and min. 35 mm depth as shown in Fig. 2.63.
– Insert the dowels.
– Attach the MK:OPEXAL to the wall in vertical position and fix it with screws and
washers.
– Connect the cables coming from the external alarm sensors at the left screw termi-
nals of the overvoltage protectors.
– Connect the symmetric pair cables at the right screw terminals of the overvoltage
protectors.
– Attach the ground wire to the yellow / green clamping terminal (see Fig. 2.64).
– Fix all cables with cable ties at the bracket of the MK:OPEXAL
– Route the cables to the ACTM and the ground wire to the PE-plate of the EMI-panel
(see Fig. 2.65).

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 73
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

diameter 6 mm
drill hole depth 35 mm
700 mm

max. 30 mm
220 mm from the rack edge

Fig. 2.63 Drilling sketch for MK:OPEXAL

cables from
external alarm sensors

Input side Output side

ground wire
to PE-plate of EMI panel
symmetric pair cables
to ACTM

Fig. 2.64 Wall mounted MK:OPEXAL

74 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

cable tie

ACTM

PE-plate
ground bolt
stress relieving bracket

Fig. 2.65 Routing of external alarm cables

– Fix external alarm cables with cables ties at the stress relieving bracket, so that a
proper electrical contact between the bracket and the cable screens is guaranteed.
– Attach the ground wire to the bolt at the PE-plate.
– Connect the external alarm cables at the matching spring terminals of the ACTM.

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 75
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

2.6.7 Installation of the MK:OPEXAL10V1


Due to the fact that external alarm sensors are located outside the building, the
MK:OPEXAL (Overvoltage Protection for external Alarms) that protects up to 10 alarm
lines is required.

OPEXAL10V1
ground terminal
module1 module0
to ACTM
optional SubD 25

from external alarm sensors mounting bar


(MK:OPEXALBV1)
ground wire to PE-plate

Fig. 2.66 Assembly Guideline

Fix the mounting bar MK:OPEXALBV1at the wall is as described in section 2.6.6.
To connect the internal and external cables perform the following steps:
1. Attach the inter-connection cable (delivered with the OPEXAL10V1) to the Sub D 25
female connector of the OPEXAL10V1.
2. Route the cable to the ACTM module in the EMI-panel of the base rack.
3. Secure the cable two times at the stress relieving facilities of the mounting bar.
4. Fix the inter-connection cable at the stress relieving bracket of the ACTM with cables
ties, so that the ground contact between cable screen and the bracket is provided.
5. Remove the plugs of the connection blocks X3 and X4 to connect the OPEXAL10V1
module no. 0 and X1, X2 to connect the (optional) module 1.
6. Setup the plugs with the connected wires at the matching blocks.

X4 X3 X2 X1

cables from
OPEXAL10V1
from module 1
S30864-X210-A105
from module 0
S30864-X210-A105

Fig. 2.67 ACTM, connection of the cables from OPEXAL10V1

76 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

Quad Binder Tape Color Wire Color Plug X4 Pin Plug X3 Pin

1 blue white/blue 1
white/orange 2
blue 3
orange 4
2 orange white/blue 5
white/orange 6
blue 7
orange 8
3 green white/blue 9
white/orange 10
blue 11
orange 12
4 brown white/blue 1
white/orange 2
blue 3
orange 4
5 grey white/blue 5
white/orange 6
blue 7
orange 8
6 black white/blue not used
white/orange not used
blue not used
orange not used
red white/blue not used
white/orange not used
blue not used
orange not used

Tab. 2.20 OPEXAL10V1 Module 0 connection at ACTM

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 77
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

Quad Binder Tape Color Wire Color Plug X2 Pin Plug X1 Pin

1 blue white/blue 1
white/orange 2
blue 3
orange 4
2 orange white/blue 5
white/orange 6
blue 7
orange 8
3 green white/blue 9
white/orange 10
blue 11
orange 12
4 brown white/blue 1
white/orange 2
blue 3
orange 4
5 grey white/blue 5
white/orange 6
blue 7
orange 8
6 black white/blue not used
white/orange not used
blue not used
orange not used
red white/blue not used
white/orange not used
blue not used
orange not used

Tab. 2.21 OPEXAL10V1 Module 1 connection at ACTM

The ground pin of the OPEXAL10V1 has to be connected with the ground terminal,
mounted on the mounting bar MK:OPEXALBV1 (see Fig. 2.68).
The pre-fabricated wire will be delivered with the OPEXAL10V1.

78 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

ground pin

clamping block for connection


of external alarm sensors

Fig. 2.68 Connector assignment of the OPEXAL10V1

The external alarm sensors will be connected with screened twisted-pair cables at the
clamping block of the OPEXAL10V1. The clamping block allows the connection of wires
with a cross section in the range 0,08 - 0,5 mm2. The label of the module gives informa-
tion about the terminal assignment of the clamping block.
In addition, the terminal assignment is displayed in the following figure.

AL36 AL37 AL38 AL39 AL40


AL24 AL25 AL26 AL27 AL28

AL_M
AL_M

AL_M
AL_M

AL_M

AL_P
AL_P

AL_P
AL_P

AL_P

GND
GND

GND
GND

GND

valid alarm no. for module 0

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30
AL_M
AL_M
AL_M
AL_M
AL_M

AL_P
AL_P
AL_P
AL_P
AL_P

GND
GND
GND
GND
GND

valid alarm no. for module 1

AL29 AL30 AL31 AL32 AL33


AL41 AL42 AL43 AL44 AL45

Fig. 2.69 Label with terminal assignment

NOTE
i Do not lay the IN-and OUT cables in parallel.

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 79
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

2.6.8 External Alarm Protection for ACTM (EAP)


If external alarm sensors are placed inside the building and the alarm lines more than
30 m long, the External Alarm Protection (EAP) has to be used.
The EAP module will be mounted on the EMI-panel of the rack as shown in Fig. 2.70.
A mounting bracket (2) is provided for the fixing the module. In addition the mounting kit
MK:HPDURV3 (1) is needed to mount the bracket.
Two prefabricated cables (4, 5) will be used for the connections between the EAP (3)
and the ACTM. Both cables are equipped with a SubD 37 female connector at the end
that will be connected at the EAP module and deisolated wire pairs for the connection
at the spring terminals of the ACTM.
One cable is used for transmission of the external alarms, the other one for transmission
of commands.
Two cables (6, 7) with 20 wire pairs each is needed for the connection between the EAP
module and the site specific alarm distribution panel.
These cables must be prepared on site. The end of each cable that should be connected
at the EAP has to be equipped with a SubD-37 female connector.
The pinning of the SubD-D37 connectors of the prefabricated cables and the color code
of the wire pairs is given in the following tables.

ground bolts

CAN IN -48 V

OVPT0 OVPT1 CAN OUT Serial IF

CAN TEST LPA

MSU

PE-bolts
2 ACTM

3 Ext.1 CU 4...7
6 4 Ext.1 CU 0...3
5
7 Ext.2 CU 4...7
Ext.2 CU 0...3
4 5

Fig. 2.70 Mounting of the EAP on the top of the BS-240 II

80 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

Pair No. Color Pin No. Pair No. Color Pin No.

1 white 1 10 red 19
blue 2 grey 20
2 white 3 11 black 21
orange 4 blue 22
3 white 5 12 black 23
green 6 orange 24
4 white 7 13 black 25
brown 8 green 26
5 white 9 14 black 27
grey 10 brown 28
6 red 11 15 black 29
blue 12 grey 30
7 red 13 16 yellow 31
orange 14 blue 32
8 red 15 17 yellow 33
green 16 orange 34
9 red 17 18 yellow 35
brown 18 green 36

Tab. 2.22 Pin / Wire assignment EAP-cable 1 and 2 (Sub-37, female)

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 81
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

Pair No. Color Block/Terminal Pair No. Color Block/Terminal

1 white X 10 1 10 red X8 11
blue 2 grey 12
2 white 3 11 black X4 1
orange 4 blue 2
3 white 5 12 black 3
green 6 orange 4
4 white 7 13 black 5
brown 8 green 6
5 white X8 1 14 black 7
grey 2 brown 8
6 red 3 15 black 9
blue X8 4 grey X4 10
7 red 5 16 yellow 11
orange 6 blue 12
8 red 7 17 yellow X3 1
green 8 orange 2
9 red 9 18 yellow 3
brown 10 green 4

Tab. 2.23 Wire / Terminal assignment EAP-cable 2 at ACTM

82 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

Pair No. Color Block/Terminal Pair No. Color Block/Terminal

1 white X9 1 10 red X5 11
blue 2 grey 12
2 white 3 11 black X6 1
orange X9 4 blue X6 2
3 white 5 12 black 3
green 6 orange 4
4 white 7 13 black 5
brown 8 green 6
5 white X5 1 14 black 7
grey 2 brown 8
6 red 3 15 black 9
blue 4 grey 10
7 red 5 16 yellow 11
orange 6 blue 12
8 red 7 17 yellow X7 1
green 8 orange 2
9 red 9 18 yellow 3
brown 10 green 4

Tab. 2.24 Wire / Terminal assignment EAP-cable 1 at ACTM

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 83
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

2.6.9 Alarm Collection Terminal ACTC - internal Alarms / DC Supply


The ACTC is used as a connection board to support single connectors for the internal
alarms (FAN, heat exchanger, temperature sensor, rack in service...) and the DC supply
for the FANs, heat exchangers, microwave equipment and smoke sensor.
The ACTC is located in the DC panel of each rack (see Fig. 2.71).

X17 X18 X19

X28 X29 X30


24 1
X26
X31 X32 X33 X37 X1 X2
X38 X39 X40
X34 X35 X36

Fig. 2.71 Connector arrangement at ACTC (BS-240)

The following tables provides information about the connecting of internal alarm sensors
at the ACTC.

84 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

AL Connector / Pin on ACTC Base / Extension Rack Service1 / Service2 Rack

Rack 0, 1, 2 Rack 3...7


0 Front side X1 RDO (High Active) RDO (High Active)
1 Rear side X20 FAN0 (High Active) FAN0 (High Active)
2 Rear side X21 FAN1 (High Active) FAN1 (High Active)
3 Rear side X22 FAN2 (High Active) FAN2 (High Active)
4 Rear side X23 FAN3 (High Active) FAN3 (High Active)
5 Rear side X24 FAN4 (High Active) FAN4 (if installed) (High Active)
6 Rear side X25 FAN5 (High Active) FAN5 (if installed) (High Active)
7 2) Front side X17, X26 / 11,12 Enva0 (High / low Active) Enva0 (High / low Active)
2)
8 Front side X18, X26 / 9,10 Enva1 (High / low Active) Enva1 (High / low Active)
9 Front side X19, X26 / 7, 8 Enva2 (High / low Active) Enva2 (High / low Active)
10 Front side X2 Enva3 (High / low Active) Enva3 (High / low Active)
11 3) Front side X37, X26 / 5, 6 Enva4 (High / low Active) Enva4 (High / low Active)
4)
12 Front side X38, X39, X40 Enva5 (High / low Active) Enva5 (High / low Active)
13 Rear side X41 Enva6 (OVP) 1)(High Active) Enva6 (OVP) 1) (High Active)
14 Front side X26 / 3, 4 Enva7 (High / low Active) Enva7 (High / low Active)
15 Front side X28...36, X26 / 1, 2 Enva8 (High / low Active) Enva8 (High / low Active)
(all connected in parallel)
Notes:
1) “High Active” if OVP is installed
2) alarm connection on clamping block X26 in parallel with dedicated connector at the ACTC rear side
3) alarm connection on clamping block X26 in parallel with dedicated connector at the ACTC front side
4) connectors X38, X39 and X40 connected in series inside ACTC and wired to alarm ENVA5
General: EnVA”X” is LMT relevant syntax

Tab. 2.25 ACTC alarms for BS-240 rack types (not for BS-240XL)

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 85
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

X17 X18 X19

X28 X29 X30


24 1
X26
X31 X32 X33 X37 X1 X2
X38 X39 X40 X42
X34 X35 X36

Fig. 2.72 Connector arrangement at ACTC (BS-240XL)

AL Connector / Pin on ACTC Base / Extension Rack Service1 / Service2 Rack

Rack 0, 1, 2 Rack 3...7


0 Front side X1 RDO (High Active) RDO (High Active)
1 Rear side X20 FAN0 (High Active) FAN0 (High Active)
2 Rear side X21 FAN1 (High Active) FAN1 (High Active)
3 Rear side X22 FAN2 (High Active) FAN2 (High Active)
4 Rear side X23 FAN3 (High Active) FAN3 (High Active)
5 Rear side X24 FAN4 (High Active) FAN4 (if installed) (High Active)
6 Rear side X25 FAN5 (High Active) FAN5 (if installed) (High Active)
5 Rear side X43 FAN6 (High Active) FAN6 (not installed) (High Active)
6 Rear side X44 FAN7 (High Active) FAN7 (not installed) (High Active)
93) Front side X17-X19, X26 / 7, 8 Enva2 (High / low Active) Enva2 (High / low Active)
10 Front side X2 Enva3 (High / low Active) Enva3 (High / low Active)
3)
11 Front side X37, X26 / 5, 6 Enva4 (High / low Active) Enva4 (High / low Active)
12 4) Front side X38, X39, X40, X42 Enva5 (High / low Active) Enva5 (High / low Active)
1)(High Active)
13 Rear side X41 Enva6 (OVP) Enva6 (OVP) 1) (High Active)
14 Front side X26 / 3, 4 Enva7 (High / low Active) Enva7 (High / low Active)
15 Front side X28...X36, X26 / 1, 2 Enva8 (High / low Active) Enva8 (High / low Active)
(all connected in parallel)
1) “High Active” if OVP is installed
2) alarm connection on clamping block X26 in parallel with dedicated connector at the ACTC rear side
3) alarm connection on clamping block X26 in parallel with dedicated connector at the ACTC front side
4) connectors X38, X39 and X40 connected in series inside ACTC and wired to alarm ENVA5
General: EnVA”X” is LMT relevant syntax

Tab. 2.26 ACTC alarms for BS-240 XL

86 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

2.6.10 Alarm Collection Terminal ACTC-3 - internal Alarms / DC Supply


The ACTC-3 collects all internal alarms of the BS-240 II / 240XL II. The board is located
in the DC panel of Base- and Extension rack, AD-panel of Service1A rack and in the LE-
panel of the Service2 rack.

X37 X48
X45
X20 1
24

Fig. 2.73 Connector arrangement at the ACTC-3

AL Connector / Pin on ACTC Base / Extension Rack Service1A / Service2 Rack

Rack 0, 1, 2 Rack 3...7


0 Front side X48 RDO (High Active) RDO (High Active)
1 Rear side X47 FAN0 (High Active) FAN0 (High Active)
2 Rear side X21 FAN1 (High Active) FAN1 (High Active)
3 Rear side X22 FAN2 (High Active) FAN2 (High Active)
4 2) Rear side X23, Front side X45 / 23, 24 FAN3 (High Active) FAN3 (High Active)
2)
5 Rear side X24, Front side X45 / 21, 22 FAN4 (High Active) FAN4 (if installed) (High Active)
6 2) Rear side X25, Front side X45 / 19, 20 FAN5 (High Active) FAN5 (if installed) (High Active)
2)
7 Rear side X43, Front side X45 / 17, 18 Enva0 (High / low Active) Enva0 (High / low Active)
8 2) Front side X45 / 15, 16 Enva1 (High / low Active) Enva1 (High / low Active)
9 Front side X45 / 13, 14 Enva2 (High / low Active) Enva2 (High / low Active)
10 Front side X45 / 11, 12 Enva3 (High / low Active) Enva3 (High / low Active)
3)
11 Front side X37, X45 / 9, 10 Enva4 (High / low Active) Enva4 (High / low Active)
12 Front side X45 / 7, 8 Enva5 (High / low Active) Enva5 (High / low Active)
2) 1)(High Active)
13 Rear side X41, Front side X45 / 5, 6 Enva6 (OVP) Enva6 (OVP) 1) (High Active)
14 Front side X45 / 3, 4 Enva7 (High / low Active) Enva7 (High / low Active)
15 Front side X45 / 1, 2 Enva8 (High / low Active) Enva8 (High / low Active)
1) “High Active” if OVP is installed
2) alarm connection on clamping block X45 in parallel with dedicated connector at the ACTC rear side
3) alarm connection on clamping block X45 in parallel with dedicated connector at the ACTC front side
General: EnVA”X” is LMT relevant syntax

Tab. 2.27 ACTC alarms for BS-240 II

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 87
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

AL Connector / Pin on ACTC Base / Extension Rack Service1A / Service2 Rack

Rack 0, 1, 2 Rack 3...7


0 Front side X48 RDO (High Active) RDO (High Active)
1 Rear side X47 FAN0 (High Active) FAN0 (High Active)
2 Rear side X21 FAN1 (High Active) FAN1 (High Active)
3 Rear side X22 FAN2 (High Active) FAN2 (High Active)
2)
4 Rear side X23, Front side X45 / 23, 24 FAN3 (High Active) FAN3 (High Active)
5 2) Rear side X24, Front side X45 / 21, 22 FAN4 (High Active) FAN4 (High Active)
2)
6 Rear side X25, Front side X45 / 19, 20 FAN5 (High Active) FAN5 (High Active)
7 2) Rear side X43, Front side X45 / 17, 18 FAN6 (High Active) FAN6 (High Active)
2)
8 Rear side X44, Front side X45 / 15,16 FAN7 (High Active) FAN7 (High Active)
9 Front side X45 / 13, 14 Enva2 (High / low Active) Enva2 (High / low Active)
10 Front side X45 / 11, 12 Enva3 (High / low Active) Enva3 (High / low Active)
11 3) Front side X37, X45 / 9, 10 Enva4 (High / low Active) Enva4 (High / low Active)
12 Front side X45 / 7, 8 Enva5 (High / low Active) Enva5 (High / low Active)
13 2) Rear side X41, Front side X45 / 5, 6 Enva6 (OVP) 1)(High Active) Enva6 (OVP) 1) (High Active)
14 Front side X45 / 3, 4 Enva7 (High / low Active) Enva7 (High / low Active)
15 Front side X45 / 1, 2 Enva8 (High / low Active) Enva8 (High / low Active)
1) “High Active” if OVP is installed
2) alarm connection on clamping block X45 in parallel with dedicated connector at the ACTC rear side
3) alarm connection on clamping block X45 in parallel with dedicated connector at the ACTC front side
General: EnVA”X” is LMT relevant syntax

Tab. 2.28 ACTC alarms for BS-240XL II rack types

88 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

2.6.11 Alarm Collection Terminal ACTC-4 - internal Alarms / DC Supply


The ACTC-4 collects all internal alarms of the BS-24o II and BS-240XL II racks and is
located at the DC panel of the Base- and Extension racks, AD-panel of each Service1A
rack and at the LE-panel of Service2 rack.

LMU Smoke RDO

X1 X2 X3 24 X4 1

Fig. 2.74 Connector arrangement at the ACTC-4

The following table provides information about the connection of internal alarm sensors
at the ACTC-4 for BS-240 II.

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 89
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

AL Connector / Pin on ACTC Base / Extension Service1A / Service2

Rack 0, 1, 2 Rack 3, ..., Rack 7


0 Front side X3 RDO (High Active) RDO (High Active)
1 Top of PCB X17 FAN0 (High Active) FAN0 (High Active)
2 Top of PCB X13 FAN1 (High Active) FAN1 (High Active)
3 Top of PCB X16 FAN2 (High Active) FAN2 (High Active)
2)
4 Top of PCB X12, Front side X4/ 23, 24 FAN3 (High Active) FAN3 (High Active)
(if not installed ENVA9)
5 2) Top of PCB X15, Front side X4 / 21, 22 FAN4 (High Active) FAN4 (High Active)
(if not installed ENVA10)
6 2) Top of PCB X11, Front side X4 / 19, 20 FAN5 (High Active) FAN5 (High Active)
(if not installed ENVA11)
7 2) Top of PCB X14, Front side X4 / 17, 18 Enva0 (High / low Active) Enva0 (High / low Active)
2)
8 Top of PCB X10, Front side X4 / 15, 16 Enva1 (High / low Active) Enva1 (High / low Active)
9 4) Top of PCB X26, Front side X4 / 13, 14 Enva2 (High / low Active) Enva2 (High / low Active) (MBR) 5)
10 4) Top of PCB X26, Front side X4 / 11, 12 Enva3 (High / low Active) Enva3 (High / low Active) (BBR) 5)
11 3) Front side X2, Front side X4 / 9, 10 Enva4 (SMOKE) Enva4 (SMOKE) (High / low Active)
(High / low Active)

12 4) Top of PCB X26, Front side X4 / 7, 8 6) Enva5 (High / low Active) Enva5 (High / low Active) 6) (MAJ) 5)
13 2) Top of PCB X7/OVP, Front side X4/ 5,6 Enva6 (OVP) 1)(High / low Active) Enva6 (OVP) 1) (High / low Active)
14 4) Top of PCB X26, Front side X4 / 3, 4 Enva7 (High / low Active) Enva7 (High / low Active) (BCHF) 5)
15 4) Top of PCB X26, Front side X4 / 1, 2 Enva8 (High / low Active) Enva8 (High / low Active) (48OTB) 5)
1) “High Active” if OVP is installed, 2) alarm connection on clamping block X4 (front) in parallel with dedicated
connector at top of ACTC-PCB, 3) alarm connection on clamping block X4 in parallel with dedicated connector
at the ACTC front, 4) alarm connection on clamping block X4 in parallel with dedicated SubD pin of link to
AC7DC, 5) AC/DC alarms (all high active) are only relevant for Service1A cabinet, 6) Enva5 (AL 12) is not avail-
able, if MAJ alarm is activated (X24 jumper setting: pins 1 and 2 connected), General: ENVA”X” is LMT relevant
syntax

Tab. 2.29 ACTC-4 alarms for BS-240 II racks

90 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

AL Connector / Pin on ACTC Base / Extension Service1A / Service2

Rack 0, 1 Rack 4, ..., Rack 7


0 Front side X3 RDO (High Active) RDO (High Active)
1 Top of PCB X17 FAN0 (High Active) FAN0 (High Active)
2 Top of PCB X13 FAN1 (High Active) FAN1 (High Active)
3 Top of PCB X16 FAN2 (High Active) FAN2 (High Active)
2)
4 Top of PCB X12, Front side X4 / 23, 24 FAN3 (High Active) FAN3 (High Active)
(if not installed ENVA9)
5 2) Top of PCB X15, Front side X4 / 21, 22 FAN4 (High Active) FAN4 (High Active)
(if not installed ENVA10)
6 2) Top of PCB X11, Front side X4 / 19, 20 FAN5 (High Active) FAN5 (High Active)
(if not installed ENVA11)
7 2) Top of PCB X14, Front side X4 / 17, 18 Enva0 (High / low Active) Enva0 (High / low Active)
2)
8 Top of PCB X10, Front side X4 / 15,16 Enva1 (High / low Active) Enva1 (High / low Active)
9 4) Top of PCB X26, Front side X4 / 13, 14 Enva2 (High / low Active) Enva2 (High / low Active) (MBR) 5)
10 4) Top of PCB X26, Front side X4 / 11, 12 Enva3 (High / low Active) Enva3 (High / low Active) (BBR) 5)
11 3) Front side X2, Front side X4 / 9, 10 Enva4 (SMOKE) Enva4 (SMOKE) (High / low Active)
(High / low Active)

12 4) Top of PCB X26, Front side X4 / 7, 8 6) Enva5 (High / low Active) Enva5 (High / low Active) 6) (MAJ) 5)
13 2) Top of PCB X7/OVP, Front side X4 / 5, 6 Enva6 (OVP) 1) (High / low Active) Enva6 (OVP) 1) (High / low Active)
14 4) Top of PCB X26, Front side X4 / 3, 4 Enva7 (High / low Active) Enva7 (High / low Active) (BCHF) 5)
15 4) Top of PCB X26, Front side X4 / 1, 2 Enva8 (High / low Active) Enva8 (High / low Active) (48OTB) 5)
1) “High Active” if OVP is installed, 2) alarm connection on clamping block X4 (front) in parallel with dedicated
connector at top of ACTC-PCB, 3) alarm connection on clamping block X4 in parallel with dedicated connector
at the ACTC front, 4) alarm connection on clamping block X4 in parallel with dedicated SubD pin of link to
AC7DC, 5) AC/DC alarms (all high active) are only relevant for Service1A cabinet, 6) Enva5 (AL 12) is not avail-
able, if MAJ alarm is activated (X24 jumper setting: pins 1 and 2 connected), General: ENVA”X” is LMT relevant
syntax

Tab. 2.30 ACTC-4 alarms for BS-240 II racks

The spring terminal block of the ACTC allows the connection of wires in a diameter
range of 0.08 mm2... 0.5 mm2

NOTE
i It is recommended to use an opto-coupler for open collector alarm I/F to be connected
to the ACTC-3. This is to avoid detection failures due to galvanic coupling of noise from
external to internal signal ground.
maximum "Alarm Low"-voltage: UceAL-AL_GND < 400mV at Ic = 2mA
minimum "Alarm High"-resistance: RceAL-AL_GND > 500 kOhm
If a switching contact (relay) is used as an alarm source I/F, the maximum "Alarm Low"-
resistance RAL-AL_GND less than 200 Ohm.

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 91
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

2.6.12 Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) Interface


A SubD 15 female connector and the RJ45 socket, located at the DC panel of the Base
rack, is the interface for connecting a Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) for commis-
sioning and maintenance purposes.

Pin No. Signal Name Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name

1 --- 6 LMT_SA 11 LMT_RB


2 LMT_TA 7 --- 12 LMT_IB
3 LMT_CA 8 GND 13 LMT_SB
4 LMT_RA 9 GND 14 ---
5 LMT_IA 10 LMT_TB 15 ---

Tab. 2.31 Pin Assignments of the LMT interface

RJ45 Pin No. Signal Name RJ45 Pin No. Signal name

1 10BT_TD+ 2 10BT_TD-
3 10BT_RD+ 4 ---
5 --- 6 10BT_RD-
7 --- 8 ---

Tab. 2.32 Pin Assignments of the LMT RJ45 interface

92 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

2.6.13 Antenna Connections


The BTSE has to be connected to the transmit and receive antennas. The antenna con-
figuration and the required cabling are dependent on the site and the type of combining.
For detailed information refer to the site-specific documentation or use the correspond-
ing customer documents.
For installation and service purposes it is useful to know, which hardware is connected
to which cell. The numbering, seen from the top of the antenna pole, starts at an azimuth
angle of 0˚ (north) and rotates clockwise.
The first existing cell whose beam centre line lies at 0˚ or more is defined as cell 0 or
sector 0. The next one following in the same direction cell is cell 1 etc.
In case of omni cell the cell no. is 0.

sector 2
sector angle

directional antenna

pole beam centre line

sector width 120˚


sector 0
N
sector 1

Fig. 2.75 Cell numbering (top view from the antenna pole)

For detailed antenna configuration, refer to the site-specific documentation.

2.6.13.1 Preparation of Antenna Jumper Cables


Short jumper cables with a max. diameter 1/2” have to be used for connections between
the antenna cables and the front connectors of the combining modules, because the
thick cables from the antenna are not able to enter the racks.
With regard to the overvoltage protection, it is recommended to ground the outer con-
ductor of antenna feeder cables where they are connected with the jumper cables out-
side the BTSE.

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 93
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

These jumper cables must be fabricated of 1/2” highly flexible coaxial cable on-site, if no
pre-fabricated cables should be used.
Fabricate the jumper cables in steps as shown in the following figures.

cable trimming tool

hot air gun


cable knife
(or propane/ butane blow torch)
open-ended spanners
(jaw opening 21mm and
25 mm)

Fig. 2.76 Tools for jumper fabrication

heat shrink sleeve

fitting ring
heat protection tape

cleaning tissue

corrugation nut

connector head

emery paper

Fig. 2.77 Parts of the connector unit kit (example)

– Measure the distance between the end of the antenna feeder cable and the front
connectors of the combining modules.
– Cut the cable to the required length. Do not deform cable outer conductor, by using
too much pressure during the cutting process!

94 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

2
rotate clockwise

Fig. 2.78 Using the trimming tool

Fig. 2.79 Removal of isolation and deburring of inner conductor

heat shrink sleeve

fitting ring

Fig. 2.80 Removal of metal particles

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 95
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

fitting ring

connector head

corrugation nut

Fig. 2.81 Assembly of the connector unit

20 mm

Fig. 2.82 Fixing of connector unit, removal of outer insulation

heat protection tape

heat shrink sleeve

Fig. 2.83 Handling of heat protection tape and shrink sleeve

96 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

hot air stream

remove extra length


of heat protection tape

Fig. 2.84 Shrinkage and removal of visible heat protection tape

The jumper cables must be routed through the cable feeding module forward to the
7/16” front connectors of DUAMCO/FICOM and to N-type male connector of DIAMCO.

NOTE
i Fix the jumper cables at 7/16 connectors with a torque wrench set to 25 Nm.
N-type connectors should work when 'finger tight". There doesn't appear to be a con-
sensus on how much torque this is in detail. Connector suppliers recommends a torque
of approx. 1,00 Nm.

NOTE
i Note that being able to close the doors means that the depth of the right angle connector
is not allowed to exceed 45 mm.

max. 45 mm

max. 1/2” jumper cable


width across flats 32

Fig. 2.85 Max. dimensions of the antenna connectors

Connect the antenna cables to the combining equipment as follows:


– Unscrew the front part of the cable feeding module.
– Route the antenna jumpers to the rack, which has to be connected.
– For grounding remove outer insulation approx. 60 mm for proper contact with the
metal lids of the cable feeding module (see Fig. 2.88).
– Feed the jumpers through the cable feeding module forward to the front connectors
of antenna combiners.
– Fix the jumpers at the connectors TX/RX of combiners.

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 97
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

– Bend the jumpers into the correct position for easy closing of cable feeding module.
– Screw the front part of the cable feeding module in its original position.

Fig. 2.86 Opening of the cable feeding module

Fig. 2.87 Antenna jumpers at the cable feeding module

Fig. 2.88 Antenna jumpers at the cable feeding module

98 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

2.6.14 Installation of the Tower Mounted Amplifier


A Tower Mounted Amplifier will be used to reach a BTS sensitivity better than GSM re-
quirements at the antenna connector and to compensate a high antenna cable loss.
The TMA should placed as close to the antenna as possible. It will be supplied and su-
pervised by the multicoupling equipment (DIAMCO or DUAMCO) in the rack it is con-
nected to.
When using a DUAMCO as antenna combiner inside the rack, only one feeder cable is
needed between the TMA and the BTS (for both TX and RX signals) due to full duplex
architecture of the TMA.

TMA TMA
Base Rack

DUAMCO CU

Fig. 2.89 Position of TMA (DUAMCO combiner used)

If a FICOM as antenna combiner inside the rack, the TMA is used in conjunction with a
DIAMCO and it only amplifies the overall BTS uplink signal.

TMA TMA

Base Rack

DIAMCO CU

FICOM

Fig. 2.90 Position of TMA (FICOM combiner used)

If a TMA used together with HPDU, a DUBIAS is required for powering and signalling of
the TMA.The configuration is shown in figure below and the installation in Fig. 2.91

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 99
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

TMA TMA
RX8
DIAMCO
RX2
RX1

CU8
DUBIAS HPDU
FICOM
CU2
CU1

Fig. 2.91 Configuration with HPDU, DUBIAS and TMA

to TMA
BIAS DIAMCO
PATH
RXIN

HPDU2 ANT0 ANT1

From FICOM RXOUT DIAMCO

Fig. 2.92 Installation of TMA and DUBIAS

2.6.14.1 Installation of the TMADV1


Two 7/16 female connectors, located at the bottom of the TMADV1 (lettered ANT and
BTS) are the interfaces for connection of the 1/2” antenna jumper cables that connect
the TMADV1 with the antenna and the antenna feeder cable towards to the BTS.
The TMA can be pole-or wall mounted in vertical position only.
The location of the external interfaces is shown in Fig. 2.93.
The mounting of the TMA may be done as follows in accordance with Fig. 2.94.
– While still on ground, join each of the 2 brackets with one screw M8, but leave the
brackets open. Be sure not to loose the remaining 2 screws.
– Position the TMA on the mast/pole and tighten the remaining 2 screws.
– Connect the TMADV1 with the jumper cables to the antenna feeder cable and the
antenna. Do not forget to consider thermal dimensional changes of the antenna
feeder cable.
– Attach the ground wire to the ground screw of the TMADV1 and connect the wire at
nearest grounding facility at the mast or pole. The ground wires eyes must have the
right size for the TMA‘s M8 ground screw and the cable should be have a cross sec-
tion not less than 16 mm2.

100 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

ANT
(input/output
towards TX/RX antenna)

BTS
(input/output
towards BTS)

grounding point

Fig. 2.93 Bottom view of the TMADV1 (Single TMA)

NOTE
i Note, that the max. diameter of the mast do not exceed 140 mm, if the fixing material will
be used as shown in the following figure.

Fig. 2.94 TMA with mounting brackets

The TMADV1 may be also mounted on a wall by means of suitable screws (not supplied
with the TMADV1)
The corresponding holes in the mounting plate have a diameter of 9 mm. The proper
way of mounting the TMA on a wall varies from case to case. The best method can only
be decided by the installer. Please note, however, that the wall itself does probably not
provide adequate grounding, it may be insulated.

WARNING
!
It is absolutely necessary to prepare and connect an adequate grounding cable to the
TMA‘s grounding point. Pay attention to the thermals dimensional changes of the anten-
na feeder cable.

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 101
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

2.6.14.2 Installation of the STMAx / DTMAx


The Single Tower Mounted Amplifiers (STMAx) and the Dual Tower Mounted Amplifiers
(DTMAx) are the RF units that provide the means to feed the downlink signal to one
TX/RX antenna and to amplify, with low noise figure, the uplink signal coming from the
same TX/RX antenna.
The DTMAx / STMAx should be placed as close to the antenna as possible. It will be
supplied and supervised by the multicoupling equipment in the rack it is connected to.
Various versions for different frequency bands of the DTMA and DTMARET are avail-
able.

Single Tower Mounted Amplifier Dual Tower Mounted Amplifier

Fig. 2.95 Example of STMAx and DTMAx

Single Tower Mounted Amplifier Dual Tower Mounted Amplifier

Fig. 2.96 Rear side of STMAx and DTMAx (example)

NOTE
i It is recommended to mount the DTMAx and the STMAx at pole or wall in a vertical po-
sition, so that the ground screw of the units is pointing downwards.
In certain cases is the mounting in a horizontal position (e.g., on cable runways) possi-
ble, it depends on the environmental conditions.

The DTMAx and the STMAx provides 7/16 female connectors for the connection with
the BTSE (lettered COM) and the antenna (lettered ANT).

102 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

Each DTMAx / STMAx shall be grounded to the pole, therefore a grounding wire has to
be prepared for each device on site.
The unit provides a ground screw with a locking washer attached to it and a threaded
hole for connection of the grounding wire. The grounding wire cable lug must have the
right size for the M8 ground screw. The cross section of the ground wire must be not less
than 16 mm2.
The other end of the grounding wire should be safely connected to a well grounded point
on the pole.
Hose clips surrounds the pole and are fitted into the corresponding openings of the
mounting plate (see rear view of the devices). This is the situation just before tightening
the hose clips.

hose clips

tighten

tighten

Fig. 2.97 Example of pole mounting with the STMAx (

For the mounting, the following steps can generally be recommended:


1. Place the unit in its final mounting position at the pole.
2. Secure the unit with a tensioning belt.
3. Close the hose clip loosely around the pole.
4. Tighten the hose clip screws carefully, but do not over-tighten (see Fig. 2.97).
5. Remove the tensioning belt.
6. Connect the DTMAx / STMAx via a 1/2” jumper cable to the antenna feeder cable
(connector COM) and to the antenna jumper cable (connector ANT). The torque
must be 25 - 30 Nm.
7. Connect the grounding wire with the ground screw of the unit. Tighten the connec-
tion to a torque of 5 Nm.
8. The use of self-vulcanizing tape as an environmental protection of the connectors is
recommended.
The DTMAx / STMAx may be mounted on a wall by means of suitable screws and dow-
els (not supplied with the device).

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 103
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

The corresponding holes in the mounting plate have a diameter of 9 mm. The proper
way of mounting the device on a wall varies from case to case. The best method can
only be decided by the installer. Please note, however, that the wall itself probably does
not provide adequate grounding, it may be insulated.

NOTE
i It is absolutely necessary to prepare and connect an adequate grounding wire to the
STMAx / DTMAx nearest grounding point. The cross section of the ground wires should
be not less than 16 mm2.

NOTE
i Pay attention to the thermal dimensional changes of the antenna feeder cables.

WARNING
!
Pay attention to the regulations for working in dangerous heights. Do not work without
fall protection equipment.

104 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

2.7 Rack Completion


The BS-240 / 240XL / 240 II / 240XL II racks are shipped including equipment compo-
nents, pre-installed by the manufacturer in accordance with customer configuration:
– Sub-rack, which holds several boards and modules
– DC panel
– Backplanes (multi-layer PC-boards, which are mounted at the rear side of the sub-
rack) and internal cabling
– Heaters and fan units
– Core modules and carrier related modules
– AC/DC converters
– Semi-rigid cables for setup of the system cabling
The following items are planned for installation after setup of the racks on site:
– Backup batteries
– Cabling between the racks (e.g. battery cabling, DC-cabling, CAN-BUS)
– Link equipment
For cable routing from one rack into another one two ways can be used. The CAN-Bus
cables and the SELIC-Bus cables will be routed above the EMI panels.
Without leaving the EMC-protected area (e.g. DC power supply, battery cables), an in-
terconnection hole in upper area of the side walls of each rack is provided. The holes
are covered by plates for single racks and the end-racks of a row.
The two mounting kits EMC as shown in the following figure contain all of the parts that
are needed for connection of two racks.

MK:EMCRV1 (BS-240 / 240XL) MK:EMCR-2V1 (BS-240 II / 240XL II)

2 4
1

1) sealing stripes 2) Contact springs

Fig. 2.98 Contents of the connection kits

Mount the parts of the connection kits in the following order:


– Loosen the security screws M3 of the cover part (Fig. 2.99) or break out the pre-
perforated part of the appropriate side wall (Fig. 2.100).
– BS-240 / 240XL: Setup the 8 sealing stripes (1) at the edges of the holes of both
adjoined racks. Move the racks close together.
– BS-240 II / 240XL II: Move at first the adjoining racks close together. Push the 4 con-
tact springs (2) over the adjacent edges of both racks.

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 105
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

– Connect the racks to one common unit with nut and screw M8x20 (3) and install the
ground wire (4) between the ground bolts of both racks (Fig. 2.101).

unscrew the 10 screws M3

Fig. 2.99 Setup of EMC sealing stripes (BS-240 / 240XL)

Fig. 2.100 Setup of EMC sealing contact springs (BS-240 II / 240XL II)

106 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

Fig. 2.101 Connection of the racks (example with BS-240)

2.7.1 Preparation of the Top Cover


Before starting the connection of external cables, prepare the top cover for later routing
the cables through the cover to the infrastructure equipment on site.
For this purpose the top cover provides removable pieces as shown in the figure below.
The required number of pieces can be removed in easy manner by breaking out at the
perforation. After that refinish the paint coat at all cracks with the paint retouch kit (Sie-
mens Serial No. A500-C101-B261).
The sharp edges of the break-outs will be covered with the sealing profile tape (Siemens
Serial No. C42127-Z1-C661). It will be delivered in 100 cm sections and must be cutted
in the required length.

Fig. 2.102 Paint retouch of the top cover

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 107
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

sealing profile tape

Fig. 2.103 Placement of the sealing profile tapes

108 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

2.7.2 Overview of Battery Sets


To enable easier transportation and setup of Service Racks, they can be delivered with-
out backup batteries. The battery tray can be equipped with different types of batteries.
The installed battery type depends on the required backup time. Each battery set consist
of 4 batteries. If a label relevant to the characteristics of the batteries is delivered, then
should be this label placed on the door of the rack.
The following battery types can be installed in the first generation of BS-240 / 240XL.

Supplier BATTPACK type MK:BATTPACK type Capacity

Excide, A400/85 BATTPACKV1 MK:BATTPACKV1 85 Ah


Oerlikon, 12CP80 BATTPACKV2 MK:BATTPACKV2 80 Ah
Oerlikon, 12CP100/19” BATTPACKV3 MK:BATTPACKV3 100 Ah
EnerSys, 12V92F BATTPACKV4 MK:BATTPACKV4 92 Ah

Tab. 2.33 Overview of backup battery sets (BS-240 / BS-240XL)

Tab. 2.34 shows the battery types, which can be installed in the racks of BS-240 II and
BS-240XL II.

Supplier BATTPACK type MK:BATTPACK type Capacity

EnerSys, 12V92F BATTPACKV4 MK:BATTPACKV4 92 Ah


Oerlikon, 12C@2000 BATTPACKV5 MK:BATTPACKV5 55 Ah
Oerlikon, 12C@2000 BATTPACKV7 MK:BATTPACKV5 55 Ah

Tab. 2.34 Overview of backup battery sets BS-240II / BS-240XL II)

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 109
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

2.7.3 Installation of Backup Batteries in Service Rack


NOTE
i BS-240 / 240 XL: As up to 2 AC/DC frames can be installed in the Service1 rack. An
identification of the AC/DC controllers is needed. The first AC/DC frame is installed in
the upper position.
Dip switches at the front of the AC/DC controller are used for selecting the Slot ID. The
following combinations are not permitted: Slot ID bit 0/1 = “ON/ON” or “OFF/OFF”. The
capacity of the installed battery systems has to be selected at the Dip switch rows of the
AC/DC controller. For detailed information refer to ITMN:BTSE.

Slot ID bit 0 Slot ID bit 1

upper frame (AC/DC 1) ON OFF


lower frame (AC/DC 2), if installed OFF ON

Tab. 2.35 Selection of Slot ID (BS-240 / 240 XL)

NOTE
i In a BS-240XL / XL II Service2 rack the extra space must not be used for a fourth set of
batteries.

If the Service1A / Service2 racks are equipped with battery trays MK:BATTFIXCB, be-
fore setup of the batteries, the spacer strips (1) have to be placed at the rear and the
front edge of the battery tray. Additional spacer blocks (2) are used to provide a distance
of 10 mm between the batteries. They will be fixed at the batteries as shown in the figure
below.

Fig. 2.104 Parts for battery fixing

110 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

bracket

spacer strips

Fig. 2.105 Placement of the spacer strips

The bracket that fix the batteries inside the battery tray has to be removed, before setup
of the battery set.
A second variant of the battery tray will be equipped with fixing plates to provide space
between the batteries. Proceed in accordance with the following figure:
– Remove the MK:BATTERY from the battery tray before fitting of the batteries.
– Mount the battery fixing plates at the bottom section of the battery tray.

MK:BATTERY fixing plate

loosen the screws

Fig. 2.106 Preparation of the battery tray

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 111
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

2.7.3.1 Installation of Backup Batteries Type “Excide”


Install and connect the backup batteries “Excide” (formerly “Sonnenschein”) in accor-
dance with Fig. 2.107 and Fig. 2.108 in the following steps:
– Switch OFF the circuit breaker at AC/DC 1-2 (BS-240 / 240 XL - Service1) and at
mounting kit battery (Service2).
– Put on the battery 2 and 3 into the battery tray.
– Connect the short cable with battery 2 (- terminal) and battery 3 (+ terminal).
– Connect one of the long cables at battery 2 (+ terminal) and battery 3 (- terminal)
– Move battery 2 and 3 as far as stop to the rear side of the battery tray.
– Put on battery 1 and 4 into the tray.
– Connect the long cable coming from battery 2 (+ terminal) at battery 1 (- terminal)
and the long cable coming from battery3 (- terminal) at battery 4 (+ terminal).
– Connect the blue load-cable to battery 4 (- terminal) and the black load-cable and the
tempresistorcable to battery 1 (+ terminal).
– Fasten the battery nuts to a torque of 20 Nm. Close and tighten both velcro straps.
– Turn up the protection cap to the end position, during fasten the cables to the battery
terminals (avoid contact of metal).

WARNING
!
Only use insulated tools for connecting the cables to the battery terminals in order to
avoid accidental short circuits.

battery2 air vent tubes battery3

battery 1 battery 4

velcro straps

Fig. 2.107 Battery tray with backup batteries type “Excide”

112 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

tempresistor cable
(color as shown not relevant)
+ 0 V (black)
- 48 V (blue)

+ +

2 3

1 4

+ +

air vent tube, routed via RF cable entry outside the rack

Fig. 2.108 Connection of backup battery set “Excide”

Setup the battery air vent system in accordance with the figure in steps as follows:
– Setup a plastic angle (1) at the air outlet of each battery.
– Fix one of the 4 clear plastic tubes (2) at each angle.
– Connect the tubes of battery 2 and 3 with the T-connector (3).
– Connect the tubes of battery 1 and 4 with cross-connector (4).
– Setup the connection between the T-connector and the cross-connector. Use the
short plastic tube (5).
– Connect the long clear plastic tube (6) at the cross-connector.
– Equip the other end of the tube with the outlet nipple (7).
– Route the tube along the right side rack frame upwards to the cable feeding module.
– The outlet part will be placed inside the cable feeding module.
– The tube must be fixed at the rack frame with cable ties.
The second T-connector (8) will be used for connecting the air vent system of a second
battery tray.

NOTE
i In order to avoid the accumulation of hydrogen gas, please make sure to install the ven-
tilation tube parts in a straight line and as short as possible, without any loops in vertical
direction.

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 113
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

2
4

7 5
3

Fig. 2.109 Contents of the air vent kit “Excide”

1 3
1

2
2
1 1
5
4
6

7 1
8

Fig. 2.110 Assembly of the air vent kit “Excide”

114 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

2.7.3.2 Installation of Backup Batteries Type “Oerlicon”


For installation of an “Oerlicon” battery set proceed in accordance with Fig. 2.111 and
Fig. 2.112 in steps as follows:
– Switch off the circuit breaker at AC/DC 1-2 (BS-240 / 240 XL - Service1) or of ADP
(BS-240 II / 240 XL II - Service1A) and mounting kit battery (Service1A / Service2).
– Put on the battery 1,2,3 and 4 into the battery tray.
– Connect the + terminal of battery 1 and the - terminal of battery 2 with the short met-
al bridge.
– Connect the following batteries in the same way.
– Connect the blue load-cable to battery 1 (- terminal) and the black load-cable and
the temp-resistor cable to battery 4 (+ terminal).
– Tighten the battery termination fixing screws to a torque with 6 Nm.
– Tighten the cable termination fixing screws to a torque with 20 Nm.

NOTE
i Turn up the protection cap to the end position, during tighten the cables to the battery
terminals (avoid contact of metal). The battery capacity must be adjusted at the AC/DC
(BS-240 / 240 XL) controller.

WARNING
!
Only use insulated tools for connecting the cables to the battery terminals in order to
avoid accidental short circuits.

After all electrical connections are complete, setup the air vent system:
– Fix the short clear plastic tubes (1) at the air vent nipples of battery 2 and 3.
– Fix the longer plastic tubes (2) at the air vent nipples of battery 1 and 4.
– Connect the 4 tubes at the collector part (3).
– Connect the long clear plastic tube (4) at the collector part.
– Route the tube along the right side rack frame upwards through the cable feeding
module.
– The tube must be fixed at the rack frame with cable ties.

NOTE
i In order to avoid the accumulation of hydrogen gas, please make sure to install the ven-
tilation tube parts in a straight line and as short as possible, without any loops in vertical
direction.

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 115
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

Temp-resistor cable battery cable +0V

battery cable -48 V

1 2 3 4

_
+ _
+ _
+ _ +

air vent system

Fig. 2.111 Connection of backup batteries (Co. Oerlicon)

1
4

Fig. 2.112 Air vent system for Oerlicon battery set

116 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

2.7.3.3 Install Backup Batteries Type “EnerSys / Hawker”


Before starting the installation of the battery sets switch “OFF” the circuit breaker at the
frame AC/DC 1-2 (BS-240 / 240 XL - Service1) or at the AD-panel (BS-240 II/240 XL II
- Service1A).

switch OFF

Fig. 2.113 Location of the Battery Breakers at the AD-Panel ADPAV3

Install and connect the “EnerSys” batteries (formerly “Hawker”) according to Fig. 2.114
and Fig. 2.118 as well as the following steps:
– Place batteries 1,2,3 and 4 into the battery tray.
– Mount the MK:BATTERY in its original position.
– Connect the battery 1 (+ terminal) and battery 2 (- terminal) with the short metal
bridge and tighten the nuts with a torque of 5 Nm.
– Connect the following batteries in the same way.
– Fasten the accompanying protecting caps over the battery terminals.
– Remove the protection cover of the MK:BATTERY.
– Connect the blue load cable to battery 1 (- terminal) and connect the black load cable
and the temp-resistor cable to battery 4 (+ terminal).
– Using a wrench set to a torque of 5 Nm, fasten the battery cable nuts.
– Shift the protection caps of both battery cables to the end position to covering of the
battery poles.

bracket

1 2 3 4

_ +

Fig. 2.114 Placement and connection of the batteries

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 117
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

“+” pole cable to MK:BATTERY

tempresistor cable

distance piece

metal bridge

battery 4

Fig. 2.115 Detail of the connection of battery 4

WARNING
!
Use only insulated tools to connect the cables to the battery nuts to avoid accidental
short circuits!

After all of the electrical connections are complete, install the air vent system of the bat-
tery set. It consist of 2,00 m plastic tube and 3 T-collectors. The plastic tube has to be
cutted into pieces with the length as shown in Fig. 2.116:

118 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

70 mm

4
100 mm

2
170 mm

Fig. 2.116 Parts of the air vent system

– Fix the short clear plastic tubes (1) to the air vent connectors of batteries 2,3 and 4.
– Fix the plastic tube (2) at the air vent connector of battery 1.
– Connect the a T-collector part (3) at the tubes of battery 2,3 and 4.
– Attach tube (2) of battery 1 to the T-collector of battery 2.
– Connect the T-collectors of battery 2 - 3 and 3 - 4 with the 100 mm tubes (4).
– Connect the pre-installed plastic tube that is routed to the gas outlet of the rack at
the T-collector of battery 4. Fix the tube at the rack frame with cable ties.

3 3 3
2
4

Fig. 2.117 Routing of the air vent tubes

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 119
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

The MK:BATTERY has to be connected with the DC input terminals of the AD-panel.
The pre-fabricated cables have to be attached to the “+” pole and the“-” pole of the
MK:BATTERY.Fix the cables at the mounting bars with cable ties as shown in the figure
below.

+ _

+ _

Fig. 2.118 Connection between the batteries, battery cable connection

120 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

2.7.4 Inter-Rack Cable Routing (standard Configuration)


This chapter provides information about the cable connections from one rack to another,
dependent on the BS-240 / 240XL or BS-240 II / 240XL II rack types and configurations.

2.7.4.1 Battery Cabling of BS-240 / 240XL


An overview of the battery interrack cabling for BS-240 and BS-240XL is provided in the
tables below.

battery battery from to length color


system cable no.

BAT 0 110/1 S1-AC/DC1-26b S1/BAT0/- (-48V) 1500 mm blue


111/1 S1-AC/DC1-25b S1/BAT0/+ (+0V) 1500 mm black
BAT 1 110/2 S1-AC/DC1-28b S2/1 BAT1 -1a 2850 mm blue
111/2 S1-AC/DC1-27b S2/1 BAT1 -2a 2850 mm black
BAT 2 110/3 S1-AC/DC2-15b S2/2 BAT2 -1a 3700 mm blue
111/3 S1-AC/DC2-14b S2/2 BAT2 -2a 3700 mm black
BAT 3 110/4 S1-AC/DC2-17b S2/3 BAT3 -1a 4200 mm blue
111/4 S1-AC/DC2-16b S2/3 BAT3 -2a 4200 mm black

Tab. 2.36 List of battery cables between the racks (BS-240)

NOTE
i Note: If the Service1 rack is equipped with two frames AC/DC (1 and 2) and only BAT0
and BAT1 should be connected to the AC/DC frames, connect BAT0 with F:AC/DC1
and BAT1 with F:AC/DC2.

battery battery from to length color


system cable no.

BAT 0 110/1 S1-AC/DC1-20b S1/BAT0/- (-48V) 1750 mm blue


111/1 S1-AC/DC1-19b S1/BAT0/+ (+0V) 1750 mm black
BAT 1 110/2 S1-AC/DC1-22b S2/1 BAT1 -1a 3300 mm blue
111/2 S1-AC/DC1-21b S2/1 BAT1 -2a 3300 mm black
BAT 2 110/3 S1-AC/DC2-15b S2/2 BAT2 -1a 4200 mm blue
111/3 S1-AC/DC2-14b S2/2 BAT2 -2a 4200 mm black
BAT 3 110/4 S1-AC/DC2-17b S2/3 BAT3 -1a 4700 mm blue
111/4 S1-AC/DC2-16b S2/3 BAT3 -2a 4700 mm black

Tab. 2.37 List of battery cables between the racks (BS-240XL)

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 121
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

battery temp-resistor-cable from to length


system no.

BAT 0 112/1 S1/BAT0 (+) S1/ AC/DC1 T0 2500 mm


BAT 1 112/2 S2/1 BAT1 (+) S1/ AC/DC1 T1 2500 mm
BAT 2 112/3 S2/2 BAT2 (+) S1/ AC/DC2 T0 5500 mm
BAT 3 112/4 S2/3 BAT3 (+) S1/ AC/DC2 T1 5500 mm

Tab. 2.38 List of temp-resistor cables

a a a a a a a a
25 26 27 28 T0 14 15 16 17 T0
b b b b b b b b
T1 T1
a b c + - + - + - + -
1 -48 V BAT0 BAT1 BAT2 BAT3
2 0V
terminal block terminal block
terminal block battery frame AC/DC1 frame AC/DC2 frame

Fig. 2.119 Terminal blocks for battery cables

Service 2/3 Service 2/2 Service2/1 Service1


top cover air vent air vent air vent
air vent

112/2 frame AC/DC 1


temp-resistor
110/2 110/1
cable 111/2 111/1
110/3 ϑ
112/4 112/3 111/3 T1 T0 112/1

frame AC/DC 2

110/4
111/4
ϑ ϑ
T1 T0

ϑ ϑ ϑ ϑ

BAT3 BAT2 BAT1 BAT0

Fig. 2.120 Overview of the battery cabling BS-240 / 240 XL

122 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

2.7.4.2 Battery Cabling for BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3)


An overview of battery intra-/interrack cabling for BS-240 II and BS-240XL II with the AD
panel variant ADPAV3 is shown in the following table.

Cable From To Color Length Factory No.


No m S30861-*

418 /1 S1/A:MK: Battery 1 S1/A: ADP/BAT0 (-) *1) blue 1,50 X215-A70
418 /2 S1/A:MK: Battery 1 S1/A: ADP/BAT0 (+) black 1,70
418 /1 S1/A:MK: Battery 3 S1/A: ADP/BAT0 (-) *1) blue 1,50 X215-A70
418 /2 S1/A:MK: Battery 3 S1/A: ADP/BAT0 (+) black 1,70
419 /1 S1/A:MK: Battery 1 S1/A: ADP/BAT0 (-) *1) blue 2,71 X215-A71
419 /2 S1/A:MK: Battery 1 S1/A: ADP/BAT0 (+) black 2,71
422 /1 S2/1:MK: Battery 3 S1/A: MK: Battery 1 or 2 blue 1,71 X215-A74
422 /2 S2/1:MK: Battery 3 S1/A: MK: Battery 1 or 2 black 1,71
422 /1 S2/2:MK: Battery 3 S2/1: MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 blue 1,71 X215-A74
422 /2 S2/2:MK: Battery 3 S2/1: MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 black 1,71
422 /1 S2/3:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S1/2: MK: Battery 3 blue 1,71 X215-A74
422 /2 S2/3:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S1/2: MK: Battery 3 black 1,71
423 /1 S2/1:MK: Battery 1 or 2 S1/A: MK: Battery 1 blue 3,00 X215-A76
423 /2 S2/1:MK: Battery 1 or 2 S1/A: MK: Battery 1 black 3,00
423 /1 S2/2:MK: Battery 1 or 2 S2/1: MK: Battery 1 blue 3,00 X215-A76
423 /2 S2/2:MK: Battery 1 or 2 S2/1: MK: Battery 1 black 3,00
423 /1 S2/1:XL MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S1/A: XL: MK: Battery 1 *2) blue 3,00 X215-A76
423 /2 S2/1:XL MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S1/A: XL: MK: Battery 1 black 3,00
140 / 1 MK: Battery 1 MK: Battery 2 blue 1,00 X216-A74
140 / 2 MK: Battery 1 MK: Battery 2 black 0,60
140 / 1 MK: Battery 2 MK: Battery 3 blue 1,00 X216-A74
140 / 2 MK: Battery 2 MK: Battery 3 black 0,60
141 / 1 F: Battery - 48V MK: Battery (2b) blue 0,60
141 / 2 F: Battery 0V MK: Battery (1a) black 0,40
*1) If required, adapt or shorten the cable length
*2) Only in case of XL-Rack: use the longer cable 423 instead the cable 422.

Tab. 2.39 List of battery cables between the racks of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A with ADPAV3)

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 123
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

Cable Signal Name From To Factory No.


No S30864-*

53 BATT TEMP F:AC/DC / CTRL / X11 F:Battery, +POL, X216-A92


(+0V) *1)
*1) Connect the battery sensor to the upper Service1- battery. If there is no battery
installed, connect the sensor to the upper battery of Service2 rack.

Tab. 2.40 Battery sensor cabling

WARNING
!
Short circuit risk! For fastening of DC supply connections at the AD panel connectors,
use only an insulated hexagonal screw key/ratchet (M6).

Service 2/1 Service 1

AC/DC frame

6 x HU for LE 0 - 5
AD panel BAT

LE panel
160A

422
ϑ 418
6 x HU for LE 0 - 5
140 141

Battery 3
160A
160A

ϑ
141
141 140
140
Battery 2 Battery 2
160A
160A

141 141

Battery 1 Battery 1

Fig. 2.121 Example of battery cabling of BS-240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3)

124 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

Service2/3 Service2/2 Service2/1 Service1/A

LE panel (S2) LE panel (S2) LE panel (S2) 423


422

160A
422
AC/DC frame

ϑ HU for LE 0 - 5
or
Battery 3
140 141 AD panel BAT
1)
Battery 3
160A

160A

160A
LE panel
418
(S1/A)

ϑ ϑ
HU for LE 0 - 5
141 141 141
140 140 140
Battery 2 Battery 2 Battery 2

160A
160A

160A

160A
ϑ

141 141 141 141

Battery 1 Battery 1 Battery 1 Battery 1

Fig. 2.122 Example of battery cabling of BS-240 II (S1A, ADPAV3)

from AC/DC system


0V -48V

to subsequent Service2 cabinet

+ MK:BATTERY 2) +
MK:BATTERY 2)
BAT / -48V B A BAT / -48V
- A B -
A

set of batteries in Service1A


160A
180A
BR 33

160A
B
set of batteries in

1)
1)
Service2

AD panel (ADP)
+
MK:BATTERY 2)
BAT / -48V
+ MK:BATTERY 2) A B -
160A
BAT / -48V B A
- 160A

1)
1) 1) battery breaker alarm line to ACTC
2) MK:BATTERY is integral part of
F:BARTTERY

Fig. 2.123 Overview of battery breakers in S1A / S2

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 125
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

2.7.4.3 Battery Cabling for BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1)


The battery intra-/interrack cabling for BS-240 II and BS-240XL II with AD panel variant
ADP-2V1 is shown in the following table.

Cable From To Color Length Factory No.


No m S30861-*

518 /1 S1A:MK: Battery 1 or2 S1A: ADP/BAT (-) 240; blue 1.90 X215-A190
240XL
518 /2 S1A:MK: Battery 1 or 2 S1A: ADP/BAT (+) black 2.10
519 /1 S2/1:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S1A: ADP/BAT (-) 240; blue 3.10 X215-A191
240XL
519 /2 S2/1:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S1A: ADP/BAT (+) black 3.30
522 /1 S2/1:MK: Battery 3 S1A: MK: Battery 1 or 2 240; blue 2.60 X215-A159
240XL
522 /2 S2/1:MK: Battery 3 S1A: MK: Battery 1 or 2 black 2.40
522 /1 S2/2:MK: Battery 3 S2/1: MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 240; blue 2.60 X215-A159
240XL
522 /2 S2/2:MK: Battery 3 S2/1: MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 black 2.40
522 /1 S2/3:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S2/2: MK: Battery 3 240; blue 2.60 X215-A159
240XL
522 /2 S2/3:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S2/2: MK: Battery 3 black 2.40
523 /1 S2/1:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S1A: MK: Battery 1 or 2 240; blue 3.00 X215-A160
240XL
523 /2 S2/1:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S1A: MK: Battery 1 or 2 black 2.70
523 /1 S2/2:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S2/1: MK: Battery 1 240 blue 3.00 X215-A160
523 /2 S2/2:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S2/1: MK: Battery 1 black 2.70
540 / 1 MK: Battery 1 MK: Battery 2 240; blue 0.55 X215-A158
240XL
540 / 2 MK: Battery 1 MK: Battery 2 black 0.55
540 / 1 MK: Battery 2 MK: Battery 3 240; blue 0.55 X215-A158
240XL
540 / 2 MK: Battery 2 MK: Battery 3 black 0.55
541 / 1 F: Battery - 48V MK: Battery (2b) 240; blue 0.265 *1)
240XL
541 / 2 F: Battery 0V MK: Battery (1a) black 0.275
*1) only for battery pole with tapped hole M8: S30864-X215-A161; only for battery pole with tapped hole M10:
S30864-X215-A162

Tab. 2.41 Battery cables between the racks of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1)

126 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

Cable Signal Name From To Factory No.


No S30864-*

53 BATT TEMP F:AC/DC / CTRL / X11 F:Battery, +POL, X216-A92


(+0V) *1)
*1) Connect the battery sensor to the upper Service1- battery. If there is no battery
installed, connect the sensor to the upper battery of Service2 rack.

Tab. 2.42 Battery sensor cabling

WARNING
!
Short circuit risk! For fastening of DC supply connections at the AD panel connectors,
use only an insulated hexagonal screw key/ratchet (M6).

Service2/3 Service2/2 Service2/1 Service1/A

FAN#0 FAN#1
LE panel (S2) LE panel (S2) LE panel (S2)
160A

FAN#0 FAN#1
522
ϑ 522
*1)
HU for LE 0 - 5
or 523
540 Battery 3
540 541

Battery 3
160A
160A
160A

ϑ ϑ 518
540 540 540
HU for LE 0 - 5
541 541 541
540 540 540
Battery 2 Battery 2 Battery 2
160A
160A
160A
160A

541 541 541 141

Battery 1 Battery 1 Battery 1 Battery 1

*1)
If the cables 518 1/2 or 519 1/2
E2
should be used to connect the
E1 MK: Battery with a Service1A
B Rack, equipped with AD-panel ADPAV3,
518-1 or 519-1 cut off the connectors and remove 24 mm of
Batt 518-2 or
519-2 the insulation.

Fig. 2.124 Example of battery cabling of BS-240 II (S1A, ADP-2V1)

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 127
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

Service 2/1 Service 1

FAN#0 FAN#1

FAN#0 FAN#1

*1)
6 x HU for LE 0 - 5

160A
ϑ 522
518
540 6 x HU for LE 0 - 5
540 541

Battery 3

160A
160A

ϑ
540
541 540
541 540
540
Battery 2 Battery 2

160A
160A

541 541

Battery 1 Battery 1

*1)
E2
E1
B
518-1 or 519-1
Batt 518-2 or 519-2

If the cables 518 1/2 or 519 1/2


should be used to connect the
MK:Battery with a Service1A Rack,
equipped with AD-panel ADPAV3,
cut off the connectors and remove 24 mm of
the insulation.

Fig. 2.125 Example of battery cabling of BS-240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1)

128 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

2.7.4.4 Battery Alarm Cable Connections


The cable connections of the battery breaker alarm is shown in the circuit diagram be-
low. The alarm terminals of each MK:Battery within a service rack will be connected in
series to lead them to the alarm-terminal of the ACTC.

Service2/n Service1A
ACTC
DCP:LEBREAK2 FAN#0 FAN#1
or ADPA/F:ACTC

462

MK:BATTERY
C NO NC
1c 1b1a
A B
160 A
463
BAT / -48 V
+ -
462
MK:BATTERY MK:BATTERY
C NO NC C NO NC
1c 1b1a 1c 1b1a
A B A B
160 A 160 A
463
BAT / -48 V BAT / -48 V

+ - + -
463
MK:BATTERY MK:BATTERY 462
C NO NC C NO NC
1c 1b1a 1c 1b1a
A B A B
160 A 160 A

BAT / -48 V BAT / -48 V


+ - + -

Cable 462: S30864-X211-A173 (Set: 2 x 462)


Cable 463: S30864-X211-A174

Fig. 2.126 Battery alarm cables

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 129
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

2.7.4.5 DC Cabling between the Racks (BS-240 / 240XL)


The DC cabling is required for routing of the -48V voltage from the DC panel of Service1
rack to the DC panels of all installed racks on site for power supply of the boards in Base
and Extension racks and the link equipment inside the Service racks.

Fig. 2.127 Routing of the DC power supply wires

+0 V -48 V

unscrew

DC supply wires

Fig. 2.128 DC terminal block access of BS-240 / 240XL

Service2 Rack Service1 Rack Base Rack Extension1 Rack Extension2 Rack

DC-Panel DC-Panel 34 1) DC-Panel DC-Panel DC-Panel


35 1)
terminal block
33 1)
279 2)
36 1)

1) Component of MK: CARSV1


2) S30864-X211-A69

Fig. 2.129 Routing of DC cabling between the BS-240 racks

130 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

cable no. polarity from DC-Panel to rack color


Service1 Rack

33 0V 13b Service 2 / 5b black


-48 V 14b Service 2 / 2b blue
34 0V 11b Base / 9b black
-48 V 12b Base / 4b blue
35 0V 9b Extension 1 / 9b black
-48 V 10b Extension 1 / 4b blue
36 0V 7b Extension 2 / 9b black
-48 V 8b Extension 2 / 4b blue
DC- Cabling to further Service2/x
cable no. polarity from DC-Panel to DC-Panel color
Service2/x Rack Service2/x+1 Rack
279 0V 5a 5b black
-48 V 2a 2b blue

Tab. 2.43 List of DC cable connections between BS-240 racks

Service2 Rack Service1 Rack Base Rack Extension1 Rack

DC-Panel DC-Panel 34 1) DC-Panel DC-Panel


35 1)

33 1)
279 2)

1) Component of MK: CARSV1 2) S30864-X211-A69

Fig. 2.130 Routing of DC cabling between BS-240XL racks

cable no. polarity from DC-Panel to rack color


Service1 Rack

33 0V 11b Service2 / 5b black


-48 V 12b Service2 / 2b blue
34 0V 9b Base / 10b black
-48 V 10b Base / 5b blue
35 0V 7b Extension1 / 8b black
-48 V 8b Extension1 / 4b blue
DC- Cabling to further Service2/x
cable no. polarity from DC-Panel to DC-Panel color
Service2/x Rack Service2/x+1 Rack
279 0V 5a 5b black
-48 V 2a 2b blue

Tab. 2.44 DC cable connections between the BS-240XL racks

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 131
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

2.7.4.6 DC Connections BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3)


The figure below shows the DC power distribution from rack Service1A, AD panel
ADPAV3 to the Base and Extension racks (DC panel) of BS-240 II / 240XL II.

Service1A Base 413 Extension1 414 Extension2 415


ACTC ACTC ACTC
FAN0 FAN1 0V
-48V
0V
-48V
0V
-48V

BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06BR07BR08 BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06 DC panel BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06
DC panel

AC/DC FAN0 FAN11 FAN0 FAN1 FAN0 FAN1

LE
X29
ACTC AD-Panel ADPAV3
+- 180A
2 1
BAT
BE1E2 BE1E2 BR 33 01
- - - +++ +-
Service Socket

413

414
415

Fig. 2.131 DC cabling between the BS-240 II / 240 XL II racks (S1A, ADPAV3)

WARNING
!
Short circuit risk! For fastening of all DC supply connections at the connectors, use
only an insulated hexagonal screw key/ratchet (M6).

cable polarity from to rack color Factory- Length


no. No. m
S30864-*

413/1 -48V S1/A:ADP:B Base blue X215-A56 1,50


413/2 0V S1/A:ADP:B Base black
414/1 -48V S1/A:ADP:E1 Extension1 blue X215-A57 2,20
414/2 0V S1/A:ADP:E1 Extension1 black
415/1 -48V S1/A:ADP:E2 Extension2 blue X215-A58 2,80
415/2 0V S1/A:ADP:E2 Extension2 black

Tab. 2.45 DC cable connections between BS-240 II / 240XL II racks (S1A, ADPAV3)

Optional: The Base and Extension racks can be also connected to an external DC power
supply via an own rack-internal MSU:DC, located at the EMI panel. In this case a
Service1 / Service1A rack is not necessary.

132 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

2.7.4.7 -48V DC Connections BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1)


The following figure shows the DC power distribution from rack Service1A, AD panel
ADP-2V1 to the Base and Extension racks (DC panel) of the BS-240 II / 240XL II.

AD-Panel ADP-2V1 DC-Panel DC-Panel DC-Panel

FAN#0 FAN#1

FAN#0 FAN#1 FAN#0 FAN#1 FAN#0 FAN#1

COBA 1
COBA 0

COSA 1
COSA 0

CU CU CU CU CU CU CU CU CU CU CU CU
#0 #1 #4 #5 #0 #1 #4 #5 #0 #1 #4 #5

FAN#2 FAN#3 FAN#2 FAN#3 FAN#2 FAN#3

513-2 514-2 515-2


DCP:LEBREAK
513-1 514-1 515-1
515-1 If the cables 513 - 515 1/2
E2 515-2
514-1 should be used to connect the
E1 514-2 Base- and Extension Racks with a Service1A
513-1
B 513-2 Rack, equipped with AD-panel ADPAV3,
cut off the connectors and remove 24 mm of
Batt
the insulation.

Fig. 2.132 DC cabling between the BS-240 II / 240 XL II racks (S1A, ADP-2V1)

WARNING
!
Short circuit risk! For fastening of all DC supply connections at the connectors, use
only an insulated hexagonal screw key/ratchet (M6).

cable polarity from to rack color Factory- Length


no. No. m
S30864-*

513/1 -48V S1/A:ADP:B Base blue X215-A192 1,15


513/2 0V S1/A:ADP:B Base black 1,10
514/1 -48V S1/A:ADP:E1 Extension1 blue X215-A193 1,75
514/2 0V S1/A:ADP:E1 Extension1 black 1,70
515/1 -48V S1/A:ADP:E2 Extension2 blue X215-A194 2,35
515/2 0V S1/A:ADP:E2 Extension2 black 2,30

Tab. 2.46 DC cable connections between BS-240 II / 240XL II racks (S1A, ADP-2V1)

Optional: The Base and Extension racks can be also connected to an external DC power
supply via an own rack-internal MSU:DC, located at the EMI panel. In this case a
Service1 / Service1A rack is not necessary.

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 133
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

2.7.4.8 -48 V DC for Link Equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3)


The DC Link Equipment Panel provides the distribution of the -48 V supply voltage to
the modules within the BS-240 II / 240XL II Service2 racks. The clamp terminals for con-
necting the DC supply wires are located on the front of the panel. A routing example of
DC cables is shown in the following sketch. The cable types for possible configurations
are listed in Tab. 2.47. If link equipment is installed in the Service1A and Service2 racks,
the associated DC:LE panel must be equipped with an appropriate number of breakers.
The LE breakers can be plugged-in during the installation of link equipment.

Service2/3 Service2/2 Service2/1 Service1A


0V-48V 0V-48V 0V-48V

+ - + - + -
FAN0 FAN1
ACTC ACTC X10 ACTC
DCP:LEBREAK2 X10
DCP:LEBREAK2 X10 DCP:LEBREAK2
AC/DC frame
403 403
406 406 2) 1)

LE ACTC
403 403 AD Panel X29
+- 180A
4) 3) 2 1
BAT
BE1E2 BE1E2 BR 33 01
0V -48V
- - - +++ +-
+ + - - ACTC
X10
DCP:LEBREAK Service Socket

0V -48V
+ + - - X10
LE breaker 402

2): if Service1A without DC panel: LEBREAK and Link Equipment


3), 4): if Service 2/1 with additional second DC panel: LEBREAK and Link Equipment
for 1), 2), 3) and 4) see also table below

Fig. 2.133 DC cabling for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3)

cable polarity from to rack color Factory- Length


no. No. m
S30864-*

402 -48 V S1/A:ADP:x29:1 S1/A:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:3 blue X215-A40 1,20


0V S1/A:ADP:x29:2 S1/A:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:1 black
403, 1) -48 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 S1/A:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:4 blue X215-A41 1,20
0V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 S1/A:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:2 black
403, 2) -48 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 S1/A:ADP:x29:1 blue X215-A41 1,20
0V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 S1/A:ADP:x29:2 black
403, 3) -48 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:3 blue X215-A41 1,20
0V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:1 black
403, 4) -48 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:4 S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 blue X215-A41 1,20
0V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:2 S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 black

Tab. 2.47 Cables for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3)

134 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

cable polarity from to rack color Factory- Length


no. No. m
S30864-*

406 -48 V S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 blue X215-A80 0,80


0V S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 black
406 -48 V S2/3:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 blue X215-A80 0,80
0V S2/3:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 black

Tab. 2.47 Cables for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3)

2.7.4.9 -48 V DC for Link Equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1)


The DC Link Equipment Panel provides the distribution of the -48 V supply voltage to
the modules within the BS-240 II / 240XL II Service2 racks. The clamp terminals for con-
necting the DC supply wires are located on the front of the panel. A routing example of
DC cables is shown in the following sketch. The cable types for possible configurations
are listed in Tab. 2.48. If link equipment is installed in the Service1A and Service2 racks,
the associated DC:LE panel must be equipped with an appropriate number of breakers.
The LE breakers can be plugged-in during the installation of link equipment.

DCP:LEBREAK2 DCP:LEBREAK F:ACTC AD-Panel DC-Panel

FAN#0 FAN#1

FAN#0 FAN#1 FAN#0 FAN#1 FAN#0 FAN#1

HU # 0 for LE HU # 0 for LE
HU # 1 for LE HU # 1 for LE

COBA 1
COBA 0

COSA 1
COSA 0
HU # 2 for LE HU # 2 for LE CU CU CU CU
HU # 3 for LE HU # 3 for LE #0 #1 #4 #5

HU # 4 for LE HU # 4 for LE
FAN#2 FAN#3
HU # 5 for LE HU # 5 for LE
160A

160A

with LE in Service1A

402

DCP:LEBREAK
X10 X10 X29 X10

33/M 503

Service2 Rack Service2 Rack Service1A Rack Base Rack

Fig. 2.134 DC cabling for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1)

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 135
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

DCP:LEBREAK2 DCP:LEBREAK F:ACTC AD-Panel DC-Panel

FAN#0 FAN#1

FAN#0 FAN#1 FAN#0 FAN#1 FAN#0 FAN#1

HU # 0 for LE HU # 0 for LE
HU # 1 for LE HU # 1 for LE

COBA 1
COBA 0

COSA 1
COSA 0
HU # 2 for LE HU # 2 for LE CU CU CU CU
HU # 3 for LE HU # 3 for LE #0 #1 #4 #5

HU # 4 for LE HU # 4 for LE
FAN#2 FAN#3
HU # 5 for LE HU # 5 for LE
160A

160A
160A

without LE in Service1A

X10 X10 X29

33/M 503

Service2 Rack Service2 Rack Service1A Rack Base Rack

Fig. 2.135 DC cabling for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1)

cable polarity from to rack color Factory- Length


no. No. m
S30864-*

402 -48 V S1/A:ADP:x29:1 S1/A:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:2 blue X215-A40 1,20


0V S1/A:ADP:x29:2 S1/A:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:1 black
503 -48 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 S1/A:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:2 blue X215- 1,30
A164
0V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 S1/A:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:1 black
33/M -48 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 blue X211- 0,90
A152
0V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 black
33/M -48 V S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 S2/3:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 blue X211- 0,90
A152
0V S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 S2/3:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 black

Tab. 2.48 DC cabling for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1)

136 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

2.7.4.10 CAN-Bus Connections


The CAN-Bus will be routed in loop configuration through the racks to collect external
and internal alarms and lead them to the ACT of the Base rack.
The configuration rules for CAN-Bus connections are valid for BS-240 / BS-240XL and
BS-240 II / 240XL II rack types.
The assignment of the cable length to the rack configuration is dependent on the mount-
ing sequence. The CAN-Bus must be terminated at the end (CAN OUT) with the termi-
nating resistor S30861-K2047-K. This measure is mandatory.
The Rack inter-connection for CAN-bus cable is from Rack top to Rack top and guided
inside the Rack roof/cover area.
The Tab. 2.49 and the Fig. 2.137 show an example of CAN-Bus connections.

cable no. from CAN OUT to CAN IN Code no. length

245 Base Service1 S30864-X210-A11 1200 mm


246 Service1/ Service1A Extension1 S30864-X210-A12 1900 mm
247 Extension1 Service2/1 S30864-X210-A13 2600 mm
248 Service2/1 Extension2 S30864-X210-A14 3300 mm
249 Extension2 Service2/2 S30864-X210-A15 4000 mm
Cables for configurations with distance between S30864-X210-A60 6800 mm
the cabinets
S30864-X210-A61 7800 mm
S30864-X210-A63 5000 mm
S30864-X210-A66 12000 mm

Tab. 2.49 Example for CAN-Bus cabling

IN
N
CA
T
OU
N
tor CA ST
sis TE
re N
g CA
a tin
in
m
ter

Fig. 2.136 Location of CAN-Bus interfaces

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 137
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

EMI-P: RS EMI-P: RB EMI-P: RE

CAN IN - 48 V CAN IN - 48 V CAN IN - 48 V

CAN OUT SERIAL IF CAN OUT SERIAL IF CAN OUT SERIAL IF

CAN TEST LPA CAN TEST LPA CAN TEST LPA

terminating
resistor
rear side of racks
246
247
245
248
249

(for BS-240/-240II only)


Service2/2 Service2/1 Service1 Base Extension1 Extension2
front side of racks

Fig. 2.137 Example for CAN-Bus cable connections

2.7.4.11 SELIC-Cabling between the Racks


The SELIC-cabling (CC-link) provides a connection between the core modules in the
Base rack and the carrier units in the Extension racks.These connections are absolute
required for transmission of signalling and alarms between the racks. The interfaces are
located on the EMI panel of Base- and Extension racks.
In a standard configuration the same type of racks will be connected only. For each con-
nection (Base to Extension1/2), prefabricated cables are provided. These cables
(S30864-X210-A2, -A23, -A38) are component of the relevant Extension racks.

Ext. 1 CU 4...7
Ext. 1 CU 0...3
Ext. 2 CU 4...7
Ext. 2 CU 0...3

Fig. 2.138 Location of SELIC interfaces (BS-240)

138 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

Ext.1 CU 4...7 CU 4...7 CU 4...7

Ext.1 CU 0...3 CU 0...3 CU 0...3

(Ext.2) CU 4...7

(Ext.2) CU 0...3

277
278

Base Rack Extension 1 Rack Extension 2 Rack

Fig. 2.139 SELIC-cabling between the racks BS-240 / 240 II

Rack- Cable From interface To interface Exten- Factory Cable


type no. Base Rack sion Rack No.: length
S30864-*

BS-240 277 Ext. 1 CU 0...3 Extension 1 CU 0...3 X210-A2 1975 mm


Ext. 1 CU 4...7 Extension 1 CU 4...7
278 Ext. 2 CU 0...3 Extension 2 CU 0...3
Ext. 2 CU 4...7 Extension 2 CU 4...7

Tab. 2.50 List of SELIC-cabling BS-240

Rack- Cable From interface To interface Exten- Factory Cable


type no. Base Rack sion Rack No.: length
S30864-*

BS-240 II 277 Ext. 1 CU 0...3 Extension 1 CU 0...3 X210-A38 1920 mm


Ext. 1 CU 4...7 Extension 1 CU 4...7
278 Ext. 2 CU 0...3 Extension 2 CU 0...3
Ext. 2 CU 4...7 Extension 2 CU 4...7

Tab. 2.51 List of SELIC-cabling BS-240 II

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 139
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

Ext. 1 CU 8..11
Ext. 1 CU 4...7
Ext. 1 CU 0...3

Fig. 2.140 Location of SELIC interfaces (BS-240XL)

Ext.1 CU 8...11 Ext.1 CU 8...11

Ext.1 CU 4...7 Ext.1 CU 4...7

Ext.1 CU 0...3 Ext.1 CU 0...3

330
162
161

Base Rack Extension 1 Rack

Fig. 2.141 SELIC-cabling of BS-240XL / 240XL II

Rack type Cable From interface To interface Exten- Factory Cable


No. Base Rack sion Rack No.: length
S30864-*

BS-240XL 161 Ext.1 CU 0...3 Extension1 CU 0...3 X210-A23 915 mm


162 Ext.1 CU 4...7 Extension1 CU 4...7
330 Ext.1 CU 8...11 Extension1 CU 8...11
BS-240XL II 161 Ext.1 CU 0...3 Extension1 CU 0...3 X210-A23 915 mm
162 Ext.1 CU 4...7 Extension1 CU 4...7
330 Ext.1 CU 8...11 Extension1 CU 8...11

Tab. 2.52 SELIC-cabling of BS-240XL and BS-240XL II

140 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

2.7.5 Inter-Rack Cabling (mixed Configuration)


This chapter provides information about the cable connections between racks, depen-
dent on the rack type and equipping variant (BS-240 / 240XL with BS-240 II / 240XL II).
Inter-rack cables are not pre-installed in the factory and foreseen for setup on site.
The required distances rack rear to wall must be considered. The required minimum dis-
tances for the rack variants are listed in Fig. 2.20. In case of mixed configuration, the
BS-240 racks have be shifted 50 mm away from the wall, to allow the rack interconnec-
tion of both rack types.
The -48V DC cable connection between the racks will be routed through the cut-outs at
the side walls of the racks.
The power cables of the BS-240 cabinets are routed behind the DC-Panel cover and the
power cable of the BS-240 II cabinets are routed visible in front of the DC-Panel.
If racks have to be fixed to the floor with earthquake kits, the relevant minimum distance
to the wall is 150 mm.
The covered cut-outs plates at the sides of the rack and the break-out pieces of the top
covers of first and second generation are not corresponding. Therefore the rack inter-
connections for SELIC-, CAN-Bus- and EMC/grounding have to be routed through re-
moved break-out pieces at the rear of the rack‘s top covers (see Fig. 2.142).

Cover Cover

Cables: e.g. CAN-Bus


SELIC
EMC-cable

2. Generation 1. Generation
View of rear side

Fig. 2.142 Adaptation of the top cover for interrack cable routing

NOTE
i According to the relevant EMC requirements, the top cover of the rack have to be
mounted always!

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 141
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

2.7.5.1 Battery Cabling between BS-240 and BS-240 II Racks


The battery backup time of already installed BS-240 racks can be extended with addi-
tional battery sets inside of BS-240 II racks. In addition to the battery kits that will used
for connections between the battery sets and connection of the battery sets with the
AC/DC frames (BS-240) or with the AD-Panel (BS-240 II), cable kits are provided for the
connection of BS-240 II Service2 racks with the AC/DC frames in the BS-240 Service1
rack.

Service2/1 Service1
SIEMENS
Service2/3 Service2/2
SIEMENS
110/3M
0V -48V 0V -48V

ACTC ACTC
111/3M
to S2/3
LE Panel (S2) LE Panel (S2)
from S1 FAN#0 FAN#1 FAN#0 FAN#1
FAN#0 FAN#1 FAN#0 FAN#1
LE-Panel
HU # 0 for LE 110/2
160A

110/4M HU # 1 for LE
111/4M HU # 2 for LE 111/2 F:AC/DC 1
ϑ HU # 3 for LE 111/2 111/1
BAT2 HU # 4 for LE
HU # 5 for LE 110/2 110/1
FAN#0 FAN#1
160A
160A

166
111/3M
ϑ BAT1 168 ϑ 110/3M
BAT3 BAT2 182 181 111/4M
110/4M F:AC/DC 2
160A
160A

166
166
168
168
ϑ
BAT3 BAT2 BAT1 BAT0

BS-240 II Rack BS-240 II Rack BS-240 Rack BS-240 Rack

F:AC/DC 1 F:AC/DC 2 ϑ
ϑ
112/1 112/3

a a a a a a a a
T0 T0
25 26 27 28 14 15 16 17
ϑ ϑ
112/2 112/4
b b b b b b b b
T1 T1
+ - + - + - + -
BAT 0 BAT 1 BAT 2 BAT 3

Fig. 2.143 Example of Battery Cabling with BS-240 and BS-240 II Service Racks

142 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

Cable no. From To Factory no. length Color

110/1/M S1/F:AC/DC1-26b S1 BAT0 with MK:BAT (-) S30864- 1300 mm blue


111/1/M S1/F:AC/DC1-25b S1 BAT0 with MK:BAT (+) X211-A146 black
110/2/M S1/F:AC/DC1-28b S2/1 BAT1 MK:BAT (-) S30864- 3300 mm blue
111/2/M S1/F:AC/DC1-27b S2/1 BAT1 MK:BAT (+) X211-A147 black
110/3/M S1/F:AC/DC2-15b S2/2 BAT2 MK:BAT (-) S30864- 3700 mm blue
111/3/M S1/F:AC/DC2-14b S2/2 BAT2 MK:BAT (+) X211-A148 black
110/4/M S1/F:AC/DC2-17b S2/3 BAT3 MK:BAT (-) S30864- 4600 mm blue
111/4/M S1/F:AC/DC2-16b S2/3 BAT3 MK:BAT (+) X211-A149 black

Tab. 2.53 Battery Cable Kits for Connection BS-240 with BS-240 II S2 Racks

Cable no. from to Factory no. length

112/1 Service1, BAT 0 (+) Service1 AC/DC 1, T 0 S30864-X210-A51 2500 mm


112/2 Service2/1, BAT 1 (+) Service1 AC/DC 1, T 1 S30864-X210-A51 2500 mm
112/3 Service2/2, BAT 2 (+) Service1 AC/DC 2, T 0 S30864-X210-A52 5500 mm
112/4 Service2/3, BAT 3 (+) Service1 AC/DC 2, T 1 S30864-X210-A52 5500 mm

Tab. 2.54 Overview of the Tempresistor Cables

NOTE
i The terminal clamps of MK:BATTERYV1/...V2 (with 50A breaker) have a maximum cur-
rent rating of 75 Ampere.

If the 50A rating of each battery set is not sufficient for the relevant BTS configuration,
the following changes are necessary in service racks of first generation:
– Replacement of each MK:BATTERYV1/...V2 (50A) by a MK:BATTERYV4 (160A).
– Replacement of the old battery cabling by the standard battery cable set for the sec-
ond generation. Exception: for the connection of booth poles of each battery set of
the relevant MK:BATTERYV4, the specific cable pair (S30864-X216-A75) must be
implemented.

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 143
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

2.7.5.2 Battery Cabling between BS-240XL and BS-240XL II Racks


The battery backup time of already installed BS-240XL racks can be extended with ad-
ditional battery sets inside of BS-240XL II racks. In addition to the battery kits that will
used for connections between the battery sets and connection of the battery sets with
the AC/DC frames (BS-240XL) or with the AD-Panel (BS-240XL II), cable kits are pro-
vided for the connection of BS-240XL II Service2 racks with the AC/DC frames in the
BS-240XL Service1 rack.

Service1
Service2/2 Rack Service2/1 Rack
SIEMENS SIEMENS

0V -48V 0V -48V

ACTC ACTC
LE Panel (S2) LE Panel (S2)

FAN#0 FAN#1
FAN#0 FAN#1 FAN#0 FAN#1

HU # 0 for LE
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE F:AC/DC 1
HU # 4 for LE 111/2 111/1
HU # 5 for LE
110/2 110/1
FAN#0 FAN#1
FAN#0 FAN#1

HU # 0 for LE
from
S1 HU # 1 for LE 111/3M
to
HU # 2 for LE S2/2 110/3M
HU # 3 for LE
HU # 4 for LE to 111/4M
S2/3 110/4M F:AC/DC 2
HU # 5 for LE
160A

160A

166

ϑ ϑ ϑ
168
160A

160A

166

168
BAT2 BAT1 BAT 0

second Generation second Generation first Generation

F:AC/DC 1 F:AC/DC 2 ϑ
ϑ
112/1 112/3

a a a a a a a a
T0 T0
25 26 27 28 14 15 16 17
ϑ ϑ
112/2 112/4
b b b b b b b b
T1 T1
+ - + - + - + -
BAT 0 BAT 1 BAT 2 BAT 3

Fig. 2.144 Example of Battery Cabling BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XL II / S2

144 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

Cable no. From To Factory no. length Color

110/1 S1/F:AC/DC1-26b S1 BAT0 (-) S30864-X211- 1750 mm blue


111/1 S1/F:AC/DC1-25b S1 BAT0 (+) A33 black
110/1/M S1/F:AC/DC1-26b S1 BAT0 with MK:BAT (-) S30864-X211- 1750 mm blue
111/1/M S1/F:AC/DC1-25b S1 BAT0 with MK:BAT (+) A133 black
110/2/M S1/F:AC/DC1-28b S2/1 BAT1 MK:BAT (-) S30864-X211- 3300 mm blue
111/2/M S1/F:AC/DC1-27b S2/1 BAT1 MK:BAT (+) A134 black
110/3/M S1/F:AC/DC2-15b S2/2 BAT2 MK:BAT (-) S30864-X211- 4200 mm blue
111/3/M S1/F:AC/DC2-14b S2/2 BAT2 MK:BAT (+) A135 black
110/4/M S1/F:AC/DC2-17b S2/3 BAT3 MK:BAT (-) S30864-X211- 4700 mm blue
111/4/M S1/F:AC/DC2-16b S2/3 BAT3 MK:BAT (+) A136 black

Tab. 2.55 Battery Cables for BS-240XL Service1 with BS-240XL II Service2 Racks

Cable no. from to Factory no. length

112/1 Service1, BAT 0 (+) Service1 AC/DC 1, T 0 S30864-X211-A44 2500 mm


112/2 Service2/1, BAT 1 (+) Service1 AC/DC 1, T 1 S30864-X211-A44 2500 mm
112/3 Service2/2, BAT 2 (+) Service1 AC/DC 2, T 0 S30864-X211-A45 5500 mm
112/4 Service2/3, BAT 3 (+) Service1 AC/DC 2, T 1 S30864-X211-A45 5500 mm

Tab. 2.56 Overview of the Tempresistor Cables

NOTE
i The terminal clamps of MK:BATTERYV1/...V2 (with 50A breaker) have a maximum cur-
rent rating of 75 Ampere.

If the 50A rating of each battery set is not sufficient for the relevant BTS configuration,
the following changes are necessary in service racks of first generation:
– Replacement of each MK:BATTERYV1/...V2 (50A) by a MK:BATTERYV4 (160A).
– Replacement of the old battery cabling by the standard battery cable set for the sec-
ond generation.
Exception: for the connection of booth poles of each battery set of the relevant
MK:BATTERYV4, the specific cable pair (S30864-X216-A75) must be implemented.

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 145
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

2.7.5.3 Battery Cabling Activities


Connect the battery sets with the corresponding AC/DC frame as follows
– Connect the wire 110/*/M (blue) at the -48 V terminal and the 111/*/M wire (black)
at the +0 V terminal of the MK:BATTERY.
– Tighten the connection with torque wrench SW13 to 15 Nm.
– Attach the cable lug of the tempresistor cable 112/* to the + pole of the battery set.
– Route the wires through the rack interconnection holes the Service1 rack.
– Remove the cover plate of the AC/DC frame.
– Insert the wires into the matching WAGO terminals of AC/DC frame 1 or 2 in accor-
dance with Fig. 2.146.
– Plug in the tempresistor cables at the sockets T 0 and T1 (see Tab. 2.54 for BS-240
and Tab. 2.56 for BS-240XL).
precutted
in the factory

connection with F:AC/DC

Connection with MK:Battery

Fig. 2.145 Battery Cables 110*/M and 111*/M

F:AC/DC 1 F:AC/DC 2

T0 T0

T1 T1

+ - + - + - + -
BAT 0 BAT1 BAT 2 BAT3

Fig. 2.146 WAGO terminal for battery cabling at F:AC/DC

146 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

2.7.5.4 -48V DC Cabling BS-240 / S1 and BS-240 II / Base, Extension


An example of mixed configuration, Service1 with Base and Extension cabinets (second
generation) is shown in Fig. 2.147.

Service1 Base Extension1


DC-Panel
0V ACTC ACTC
0V
1) -48V -48V

BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06 BR07BR08 BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06 DC panel

FAN0 FAN11 FAN0 FAN1


DCP:RSHS1
a a
a a a a a a a a a a a a a
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

b b b b b

c b c b c c bc
b b b b b b b

(to (to Ext.2)


Serv.2) to Ext.1
to Base

1)

first Generation second Generation


second Generation

1) Type of cable (16 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C105 (black)


C39195-Z70-C66 (blue)

Fig. 2.147 -48V DC connections BS-240 / S1 and BS-240II / Base and E1

The following rule must be taken into account:


– The DC-breaker ratings of Service1 are limited (50A) for DC power supply the Base
and Extension racks. Therefore only CU configurations can be implemented in Base
and Extension, which DC supply currents not exceed the breaker rating of 50A.

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 147
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

2.7.5.5 -48V DC Cabling BS-240 II / S1A and BS-240 / Base, Extension


The Fig. 2.148 shows an example for the -48V power supply connection of a Service1A
rack BS-240 II with Base and Extension BS-240. The Service1A rack is equipped with
the AD-panel ADPA.

NOTE
i If a Service1A supplies a Base (second generation) or an Extension (second genera-
tion) the 80A DC-breakers (AD-panel: BR28, BR29 and BR30) must be replaced by a
50A type! This reduction in power for the affected rack must be considered for configu-
ration planning! Therefore a mounting kit must be ordered with three 50A breakers (Fac-
tory no.: S30864-X215-A126).

SIEMENS Service1A Base Extension1


DCP:RSHB DCP:RSHE
FAN#0 FAN#1 ACTC ACTC

LE 180A
AD Panel +-
BR 33
ACTC
a a
X29 a a a a
-48V a a a a a a a a a aa a a a a a a a a a aa
B E1 E2 B E1E2 0 1 b b
- - - +++ + -

1413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
b b b b b bb b b bb c b b b b b bb b b bb c

LE Panel c c c c c b cc c c bcc d c c c c c b cc c c bcc d


0V -48V

HU # 0 for LE 0V -48V 0V -48V

HU # 1 for LE 462
461
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE to AD Panel S1A to AD Panel S1A
HU # 4for LE
HU # 5for LE
160A

second Generation first Generation first Generation

Fig. 2.148 DC cabling BS-240 II / S1A and BS-240 / Base, E1 (S1A, ADPAV3)

Cable no. from to Color Length Factory No.

461 S1A/ADPA/B/ -48V Base/DCP inside/ 4b/-48V blue 1.6 m S30864-X215-


A127
S1A/ADPA/B/ 0V Base/DCP inside/ 9b/0V black
462 S1A/ADPA/E1/ -48V Extension1/DCP inside/ 4b/-48V blue 2.2 m S30864-X215-
A128
S1A/ADPA/E1/ 0V Extension1/DCP inside/ 9b/0V black
463 S1A/ADPA/E2/ -48V Extension2/DCP inside/ 4b/-48V blue 2.8 m S30864-X215-
A129
S1A/ADPA/E2/ 0V Extension2/DCP inside/ 9b/0V black

Tab. 2.57 Cables from Service1A to Base and Extension1/2 (S1A, ADPAV3)

148 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

If the Service1A is equipped with an AD-panel ADP-2V1, connect it with the Base- and
Extension racks of the BS-240 as shown in the figure below.

DCP:LEBREAK AD-Panel ADP-2V1 DCP:RSHB DCP:RSHB

DCP:RSHE
FAN#0 FAN#1 ACTC ACTC
513 514 515*

a a
a a a a
a a a a a a a a a aa a a a a a a a a a aa
b b

1413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
b b b b b bb b b bb c b b b b b bb b b bb c

c c c c c b cc c c bcc d c c c c c b cc c c bcc d

0V -48V 0V -48V

513 514
to AD Panel S1A to AD Panel S1A

Service1A Base Extension1


second Generation first Generation first Generation

515-1
515-2
514-1
514-2
513-1
513-2
Batt
515* to Extension2

If the cables 513-515 1/2


should be used to connect the
Base- and Extension Racks with a Service1A
Rack, equipped with AD-panel ADPA,
cut off the connectors and remove 24 mm of
the insulation.

Fig. 2.149 DC cables from Service1A to Base and Extension1(S1A, ADP-2V1)

Cable no. from to Color Length Factory No.

513 S1A/ADP-2V1/B/-48V Base/DCP inside/ 4b/-48V blue 1.15 m S30864-X215-


A192
S1A/ADP-2V1/B/ 0V Base/DCP inside/ 9b/0V black 1,10 m
514 S1A/ADP-2V1/E1/-48V Base/DCP inside/ 4b/-48V blue 1.75 m S30864-X215-
A193
S1A/ADP-2V1/E1/ 0V Base/DCP inside/ 9b/0V black 1,70 m
515 S1A/ADP-2V1/E2/-48V Base/DCP inside/ 4b/-48V blue 2,35 m S30864-X215-
A194
S1A/ADP-2V1/E2/ 0V Base/DCP inside/ 9b/0V black 2,30 m

Tab. 2.58 Cables from Service1A to Base and Extension 1/2 (S1A, ADP-2V1)

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 149
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

2.7.5.6 -48V DC Cabling BS-240 / S1 and BS-240 II / S2


An example of mixed configuration, Service1 with Service2 cabinets (second genera-
tion) is shown in Fig. 2.150.

NOTE
i For the combination of Service1 with Service2 racks (second generation) the implemen-
tation of the DCP:LEBREAK2V2 is mandatory.

Service2/2 Rack Service2/1 Rack Service1


SIEMENS SIEMENS

0V -48V 0V -48V DCP:RSHS1


ACTC ACTC
LE Panel (S2) LE Panel (S2)
33/M 33/M 33
FAN#0 FAN#1 FAN#0 FAN#1

HU # 0 for LE
HU # 1 for LE
a a
HU # 2 for LE a a a a a a a a a a a a a
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
HU # 3 for LE
to Service2/3 HU # 4 for LE b b b b b

HU # 5 for LE c b
b b b b b b b
c b c c bc

160A
160A

33 (to Ext.2)
(to Serv.2) to Ext.1
160A
to Base
160A

second Generation second Generation first Generation

Cable 33: component of MK:CARSVx


Type of cable (10 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C103 (black)
C39195-Z70-C65 (blue)
Cable 33/M: S30864-X211-A152
Type of cable (6 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C89 (black)
C39195-Z70-C88 (blue)
(high power cable type)

Fig. 2.150 DC cabling between BS-240 / S1 and BS-240 II / S2 racks

150 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

2.7.5.7 DC Cabling BS-240 II / S1A and BS-240 / S2


An example of mixed configuration, Service1A with Service2 cabinets (first generation)
is shown in Fig. 2.151 (example with AD-panel ADPA).

NOTE
i Service1A racks must not be connected to battery sets installed in Service2 racks of first
generation! Only link equipment can be installed in Service2 rack.

NOTE
i The total current consumption of all link equipment of Service1A/Service2 racks must
not exceed 25A. (DC breaker rating of Breaker25 in Service1A: 25A)

Service2/2 Service2/1 SIEMENS Service1A


DCP:RSHS2 DCP:RSHS2
ACTC ACTC FAN#0 FAN#1

33/M 33/M 453

to Service2/1 to Service1A AD Panel LE


+-
180A
ACTC
BR 33

33/M 453 -48V


X29

B E1 E2 B E1E2 0 1
0V -48V 0V -48V - - - +++ + -

0V -48V
a a a a
a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 402
LE Panel

98 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 98 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 HU # 0 for LE
b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
HU # 1 for LE
c c c c b c c bc c c c c b c c bc
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
HU # 4for LE
33/M 33/M
HU # 5for LE
to Service2/3 to Service2/2

160A

first Generation first Generation second Generation

Cable 402: S30864-X215-A40; component of MK:CAR-2S1Vx (Service1A rack)


Type of cable (2,5 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C113 (black)
C39195-Z70-C114 (blue)
Cable 453: S30864-X215-A119
Type of cable (6 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C89 (black)
C39195-Z70-C88 (blue)
(high power cable type)
Cable 33/M: S30864-X215-A152
Type of cable (6 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C89 (black)
C39195-Z70-C88 (blue)
(high power cable type)

Fig. 2.151 DC cables between BS-240II/ S1A and BS-240/S2 (S1A, ADPAV3)

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 151
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

DCP:RSHS2 DCP:RSHS2
ACTC ACTC FAN#0 FAN#1
33/M 33/M 503

to Service2/1 to Service1A
33/M 503
0V -48V 0V -48V

a a a a
a a a a a a a a a a a a a a

98 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 98 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
b b b b b b b b b b b b b b

c c c c b c c bc c c c c b c c bc

33/M 33/M

to Service2/3 to Service2/2

first Generation first Generation Service1A


second Generation

Cable No. 503: S30864-X215-A164, length 1.30 m


Cable No. 33/M: S30864-X215-A152, length 0.90 m

Fig. 2.152 DC cables between BS-240UII/S1A and BS-240/S2 (S1A, ADP-2V1)

152 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

2.7.5.8 DC Cabling BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XL II / Base, Extension


An example of mixed configuration, Service1 with Base and Extension cabinets (second
generation) is shown in Fig. 2.153.

Service1 Base Extension1


DC-Panel
0V ACTC ACTC
0V
1) -48V -48V

BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06 BR07BR08 BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06 DC panel


DCP:R12S1
FAN0 FAN11 FAN0 FAN1
a a a a
a a a a
a a a a a

b b b b

13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
b c c c c
b b b b
b b b b
(to
Serv.2) 35 to Ext.1
34 to Base

1)

first Generation second Generation second Generation

1) Type of cable (25 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C134 (black)


C39195-Z70-C135 (blue)
(Component of MK:CARSV1 / S30864-X215-A28)

Fig. 2.153 DC connections between BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XLII / Base, E1

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 153
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

2.7.5.9 DC Cabling BS-240XL II / S1A and BS-240XL / Base, Extension


The Fig. 2.154 shows an example of the -48V power supply connections between a
Service1A rack and Base / Extension rack (first generation).

SIEMENS Service1A Base Extension1


DC-Panel DC-Panel
FAN#0 FAN#1 ACTC ACTC

DCP:R12B DCP:R12E

LE 180A
a a a a
AD Panel +-
ACTC

X29
BR 33
a a a a
-48V
B E1 E2 B E1E2 0 1
a aa a a a a a a a a a aa a a a a a a
- - - +++ + - 1514131211 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 13121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

bb bb bb b bb bb bb b b b b b bb
LE Panel
0V -48V
c c c c b c c c b c c c c c c c c b c c b c c c
HU # 0 for LE
b b b b
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 2 for LE 0V -48V 0V -48V
HU # 3 for LE 413 414
to AD Panel S1A to AD Panel S1A
160A
160A

second Generation first Generation first Generation

1) Type of cable (25 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C134 (black)


C39195-Z70-C135 (blue)

Fig. 2.154 DC connections between BS-240XLII / S1A and BS-240XL / Base, E1

154 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

2.7.5.10 DC Cabling BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XL II / S2


An example of mixed configuration, Service1 with Service2 cabinets (second genera-
tion) is displayed in Fig. 2.155.

NOTE
i For the combination of Service1 with Service2 racks (second generation) the implemen-
tation of the DCP:LEBREAK2V2 is mandatory!

Service2/2 Rack Service2/1 Rack Service1


SIEMENS SIEMENS

0V -48V 0V -48V DCP:RSHS1


ACTC ACTC
LE Panel (S2) LE Panel (S2)
33/M 33/M 33
FAN#0 FAN#1 FAN#0 FAN#1

HU # 0 for LE
a a
HU # 1 for LE a a a a a a a a a a a a a
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
to Service2/3 HU # 4 for LE
b b b b b

c b c b c c bc
HU # 5 for LE b b b b b b b

FAN#0 FAN#1 33
(to to Ext.1
HU # 0 for LE
HU # 1 for LE Serv.2) to Base
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
HU # 4 for LE
HU # 5 for LE
160A

160A
160A
160A

second Generation second Generation first Generation

Cable 33: component of MK:CARSVx


Type of cable (10 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C103 (black)
C39195-Z70-C65 (blue)
Cable 33/M: S30864-X211-A152
Type of cable (6 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C89 (black)
C39195-Z70-C88 (blue)
(high power cable type)

Fig. 2.155 DC connections between BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XL II / S2

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 155
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

2.7.5.11 DC Cabling BS-240XL II / S1A and BS-240XL / S2


An example of mixed configuration, Service1A with Service2 cabinets (first generation)
is shown in Fig. 2.156.

NOTE
i Service1A racks must not be connected to battery sets installed in Service2 racks of first
generation! Only link equipment can be installed in Service2 rack.

NOTE
i The total current consumption of all link equipment of Service1A/Service2 racks must
not exceed 25A. (DC breaker rating of Breaker25 in Service1A: 25A)

Service2/2 Service2/1 SIEMENS Service1A


DCP:RSHS2 DCP:RSHS2
ACTC ACTC FAN#0 FAN#1

33/M 33/M 453

to Service2/1 to Service1A AD Panel LE


+-
180A
ACTC
BR 33

33/M 453 -48V


X29

B E1 E2 B E1E2 0 1
0V -48V 0V -48V - - - +++ + -

a a a a 0V -48V
a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 402
LE Panel

98 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 98 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 HU # 0 for LE
b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
HU # 1 for LE
c c c c b c c bc c c c c b c c bc
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
33/M 33/M
to Service2/3 to Service2/2

160A
160A

first Generation first Generation second Generation

Cable 402: S30864-X215-A40; component of MK:CAR-2S1Vx (Service1A rack)


Type of cable (2,5 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C113 (black)
C39195-Z70-C114 (blue)
Cable 453: S30864-X215-A119
Type of cable (6 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C89 (black)
C39195-Z70-C88 (blue)
(high power cable type)
Cable 33/M: S30864-X215-A152
Type of cable (6 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C89 (black)
C39195-Z70-C88 (blue)
(high power cable type)

Fig. 2.156 DC connections between BS-240XL II/ S1A and BS-240XL / S2

156 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

2.7.5.12 SELIC-Cabling between the Racks (mixed Configuration)


In case of extension of an existing Base Station system with additional Extension racks
the following combinations are possible:
– BS-240 Base -> BS-240 II Extension
– BS-240 Base -> BS-240XL / 240XL II Extension
– BS-240 II Base -> BS-240 Extension
– BS-240 II Base -> BS-240XL / 240XL II Extension
– BS-240XL / 240XL II Base -> BS-240 Extension
– BS-240XL / 240XL II Base -> BS-240 II Extension
The necessary cables for extension combinations have to be ordered additionally (see
Tab. 2.59 and Tab. 2.60). For mixed configuration with distance between the racks
(Tab. 2.60) the cable sets include an appropriate CAN-Bus cable.

Rack type Selic cable lengths with Factory No.: S30864-*

BS-240 Ext. BS-240 II Ext. BS-240XL /


240XL II Ext.

BS-240 Base cable length see standard 1920 mm 1460 mm


configuration
S30864-* X210-A68 X210-A27
BS-240 II Base cable length 1920 mm see standard 1460 mm
configuration
S30864-* X210-A68 X210-A69
BS-240XL / cable length 1460 mm 1460 mm see standard
240XL II Base configuration
S30864-* X210-A74 X210-A75

Tab. 2.59 SELIC-cabling (mixed configuration without distance between cabinets)

Rack type Selic cable lengths with Factory No.: S30864-*

BS-240 Ext. BS-240 II Ext. BS-240XL /


240XL II Ext.

BS-240 Base cable length 4120 mm or 4070 mm or 3612 mm or


6970 mm 6920 mm 6462 mm
S30864-* X211-A123 or X211-A132 or X211-A125 or
A118 A133 A120
BS-240 II Base cable length 4070 mm or 4070 mm or 3612 mm or
6920 mm 6920 mm 6462 mm
S30864-* X211-A132 or X211-A126 or X211-A134 or
A133 A121 A135
BS-240XL / cable length 3612 mm or 3612 mm or 3114 mm or
240XL II Base 6462 mm 6462 mm 5960 mm
S30864-* X211-A136 or X211-A138 or X211-A122 or
A137 A139 A116

Tab. 2.60 SELIC-cabling (mixed configuration with distance between cabinets)

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 157
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

2.7.6 Combination of Racks with different Heights

2.7.6.1 BS-240 II / S1A with BS-240XL II / Extension


A BS-240XL II Extension rack can be added to an existing BS-240 II Base rack to in-
crease BTS capacity.
screening measure
see view B

cable duct Extension1


414 MSU:DC

screening measure ACTC


0V
see view A -48V

cable ties BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06 DC panel

FAN0 FAN1

Service1A Base 413

0V ACTC
FAN#0 FAN#1 -48V

BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06 BR07BR08

FAN0 FAN1

LE 180A
AD Panel +-
BR 33
ACTC

X29
-48V
B E1 E2 B E1E2 0 1
- - - +++ + -

LE Panel
0V -48V

HU # 0 for LE
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
HU # 4for LE
HU # 5for LE
160A

BS-240 II BS-240 II BS-240XL II

Fig. 2.157 DC connection (BS-240 / S1A with BS-240XL II / Extension)

Use the following pre-fabricated cables for connection of the racks:


– Cable 414: DC cable pair (25 mm2) with braided shield, copper wires 0.15 mm,
tinned, C39195-Z70-C158 (BK Type S07V-C4V5-K)
– Cable 446: Grounding cable (16 mm2), C39195-Z70-C105 (BK Type S07V-K)
The outer insulation of both DC-cables that to be routed through the cable feeding mod-
ule of the Service1A rack has to be removed at the EMC-gasket (see Fig. 2.158). This
measure guarantees a proper contact between the cable screen and the mesh screened
rubber profiles.

158 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

-48V +0V

414
EMC - bar

15 mm
stress - relieving
cable ties

Fig. 2.158 (View A) Preparation of the DC cables at the cable feeding module

Route the DC-cables to the rear side of the Extension rack in a suitable cable duct. Re-
move the insolation of the cables approximately 15 mm for contact of the screen to the
stress relieving clamp at the right edge of rack (Fig. 2.159). Connect the cables 414-1
and 414-2 to the terminal block of the MSU:DC.

DC -cables from Service1A rack

common ground cable 446


rear side of rack
from Service1A rack

grounding bolts
screen connection
414-2 414-1

+0V -48V

to MSU:DC

Fig. 2.159 (View B) Cable connections to Ground and MSU:DC of Extension

The connection between the racks will be completed by the routing of the common
ground cable no. 446. The cable is equipped with cable lugs at both ends and will be
attached to the M8 ground bolts at the rear side of the EMI panel.
For SELIC cabling refer to the chapter 2.7.5.12.
For CAN-Bus cabling refer to the chapter 2.7.4.10.

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 159
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

2.7.7 Installation of Link Equipment


The link equipment acts as a front end, to provide the Abis interface. Different equipment
can be used for wire or radio transmission. Which equipment will be used depends on
customer requirements.
The number of link equipment, that can be installed depends on the height of the units.

NOTE
i For connections between Abis interface in the Base rack and link equipment in the Ser-
vice rack, pay attention to the recommendation CCITT G.703.
The receive level compared with the transmit level should not be lower than 6 dB.

For the installation of link equipment, the mounting kit MK:LE is needed always and de-
signed for 19” units. The MK:LE will fixed at the mounting bars on the right and left side
of the rack. 4 screws Torx T30 are needed for fixing.
The MK:LE holds the customer-dependent frames for microwave equipment or the
frame for 2 NTPM, F:NT (german market only).
The installation of link equipment in the mounting kit has always to start at the top of the
mounting kit below the DC-panel without a gap, so that the airflow inside the rack will
not be affected.

MK:LE

Fig. 2.160 Mounting Kit for Link Equipment MK:LE

160 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

2.7.7.1 Installation of Microwave Equipment


In case of microwave transmission, the indoor units inside the Service rack have to be
connected via the microwave antenna cables with the tower mounted outdoor units.

NOTE
i The outer insulation of the microwave antenna cables has to be removed in the area of
the cable feeding module for proper ground contact to the metal lids.

Connect the microwave antenna cables at the indoor units as follows:


1. Remove the front part of cable feeding module.
2. Feed the microwave cables through the cable feeding module forward to the front
connectors of microwave indoor units.
3. Fix the microwave cables at the front connectors of the indoor units. The connector
type and fixing torque depends on the equipment, provided by the customer.
4. Bend the microwave cables into the a position that it is able to close the cable feed-
ing module without any pressure and tension.
5. Fix removable part in its original position.
6. Fix each cable at the strain reliefs of the feeding module with cable ties.
The next step is the connection of the microwave indoor units with the -48 VDC circuit of
the Service rack and the alarm lines at the spring terminals of the ACTC. Because con-
struction differences between the BS-240 and the BS-240 II rack, proceed in different
ways. In case of BS-240 Service racks perform the following steps:
1. Connect the microwave power supply / alarm cables (S30864-X211-A57) at the front
connectors of ACTC (see the following figure).
2. Route the cables down to the microwave units and fix them at the right subrack
mounting bar with cable ties.
3. Attach equipment-specific connectors at the cable ends that should be connected to
the microwave units.

Service rack

1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9

microwave connectors
(ACTC)
up to 9 cables
S30864-K2045-X-*-7483
AL15_P µWave (white)
AL15_P AL_GND (black)
frame for
link equipment

DC_µWave... PUE +0 V (red)


DC_µWave... MUE -48 V (blue)

Fig. 2.161 Cabling for link equipment (BS-240 / 240XL)

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 161
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

Install the DC-supply wires in case of the BS-240 II Service1A rack as follows:
1. Remove the cover plate of the DC-distribution block at the DC-panel.
2. Fit the breakers for link equipment (can be 4A breaker, V39118-Z4005-A91 or 10A,
V39118-Z4005-A91). The number of breakers depends on the volume of microwave
units, that should be installed.
3. Connect the blue/black twisted wire pairs (cable no. 401, S30864-X215-A39) at the
2-pole connectors X25F (R)- X32F (R) of the DC-distribution block.
4. Route the cables down to the microwave units and fix them at the left subrack mount-
ing bar with cable ties.
5. Attach the equipment-specific connector at the cable ends, that should be connect-
ed at the DC-input of the microwave units.

remove the cover plate

Fig. 2.162 Connection of the DC supply cables (cable no. 401)

Install the alarm line connection between the microwave units and the ACTC:
1. Measure the distance between the alarm output of the microwave units and the ter-
minal block of the ACTC module in the F:ACTC-2V1.
2. Cut stranded wires with a cross section in the range of 0,08 mm2 - 0,5 mm2 (e.g.
LI7Y 2x0,34/1,3 blue/black) to the required length.
3. Remove 10 mm of the insulation and attach the wires to the matching spring termi-
nals of the ACTC.
4. Route the wires down to the microwave units and fix the bundle at the right subrack
mounting bar with cable ties.
5. If necessary, equip the stranded wires with a connector. The type depends on the
alarm interface of the microwave units.
The installation steps of the DC-supply and alarm cables for the microwave units in the
BS-240 II Service2 racks are equal to the Service 1A rack. In this case, the ACTC mod-
ule is part of the DC-panel and located on the right of the link equipment breakers.
In the DC-panels of the Service2 rack, the link equipment breakers BR01- BR06 (con-
nectors X25F (R) - X30F (R) can be used for the protection of the microwave units.
The following graphics should illustrate the DC cabling in both rack types.

162 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

+0 V

-48 V

BR01 BR02 BR03 BR04 BR05 BR06 BR07 BR08

4A or 4A or 4A or 4A or 4A or 4A or 4A or 4A or
10A 10A 10A 10A 10A 10A 10A 10A
X25R

X26R

X27R

X28R

X29R

X30R

X31R

X32R
X25F

X26F

X27F

X28F

X29F

X30F

X31F

X32F
mWave 5
mWave 3

mWave 4
mWave 1

mWave 2
mWave 0

mWave 6

mWave 7
mWave 11
mWave 10
mWave 8

mWave 9

cables no. 401 cables no. 401


example for 2 microwave units per breaker example for 1 microwave unit per breaker

Fig. 2.163 DC distribution block with microwave units in Service1A (BS-240 II)

+0 V

-48 V

BR01 BR02 BR03 BR04 BR05 BR06 BR07 BR08

4A or 4A or 4A or 4A or 4A or 4A or 4A or 4A or
10A 10A 10A 10A 10A 10A 10A 10A
X25R

X26R

X27R

X28R

X29R

X30R

X31R

X32R
X25F

X26F

X27F

X28F

X29F

X30F

X31F

ACTC, DC IN X32F
mWave 5
mWave 3

mWave 4
mWave 1

mWave 2
mWave 0

ACTC, FAN
mWave 11
mWave 10
mWave 6

mWave 9
mWave 8
mWave 7

cables no. 401 cable no. 408 407

Fig. 2.164 DC distribution block with microwave units in Service2 (BS-240 II)

The next step is the routing of the PCM-lines between the OVPT / ABISCON in the Base
rack and the PCM interfaces of the microwave indoor units. Therefore the pre-fabricated
cable S30864-X207-A8-*-7402 should be used. The cable is used as a splitter.
It consists of four single cables with Sub D-9 female connectors for the connection of a
microwave unit at each connector. The cables are attached to a common Sub D-25 fe-
male connector. The cable will be expanded with cable S30864-X211-A112 for the con-
nection with the OVPT / ABISCON.

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 163
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

Signal Name Plug Sub D9 f Plug Sub D25 OVPT Terminal


Pin No. Pin No. Pin No.

cable no. S30864-X207-A8-*-7402

cable no. S30864-X211-A112

PCM 1 - ULA 1 1 22
PCM 1 - ULB 6 14 20
GND/G 3 3 18
PCM 1 - DLA 5 2 21
PCM 1 - DLB 9 15 19
GND/G --- --- 23
PCM 2 - ULA 1 4 16
PCM 2 - ULB 6 16 14
GND/G 3 18 18
PCM 2 - DLA 5 5 15
PCM 2 - DLB 9 17 13
GND/G --- --- 17
PCM 3 - ULA 1 6 10
PCM 3 - ULB 6 19 8
GND/G 3 8 12
PCM 3 - DLA 5 7 9
PCM 3 - DLB 9 20 7
GND/G --- --- 11
PCM 4 - ULA 1 9 4
PCM 4 - ULB 6 21 2
GND/G 3 23 6
PCM 4 - DLA 5 10 3
PCM 4 - DLB 9 22 1
GND/G --- --- 5
GND/G --- --- 28

Tab. 2.61 Pre-fabricated cables between OVPT/ABISCON and the microwave units

An overview about the complete microwave cabling of both rack designs is given in the
following figure.

164 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

to ODU BS-240 II / 240XL II to ODU BS-240 / 240XL


Service Rack Base Rack Service Rack Base Rack
top view top view

OVPT OVPT
7) 7)

EMI panel EMI panel


DC panel ACTC rack front ACTC rack front
breaker panel 1)
1)
alarm lines
-48Vdc 5) 3) twisted pair
m m
supply lines Sub D 25 Sub D 25
f 4) -48 Vdc supply and
f 4)
alarm lines 6)
f Sub D 9
Sub D 9 f
m m m
Sub D 25 m Sub D 25
4) PCM1 f 4) PCM1
f
f PCM0 PCM0
SubD 9 SubD 9 f
F:CORE m
F:CORE
m
2) 2)

LE1-4 LE1-4

LE5-8 LE5-8

1) integral part of cabinet cabling


2) has to be prepared on site
3) pair of stranded wires, e.g. C39195-Z75-C510 (Type: LI7Y 2x0,34/1,3 BL/SW VS)
4) can be ordered as prepared cable (Octopus cable), order-no.: S30864-X207-A8-*-7402
5) can be ordered as prepared cable, order-no.: S30864-X215-A39, (twisted pair, blue: -48 Vdc, black: 0 Vdc)
6) can be ordered as prepared cable, order-no.: S30861-K2045-X-*-7483, (power cable for microwave module)
7) can be ordered as prepared cable, order-no.: S30864-X211-A112

Fig. 2.165 Overview of microwave cabling

2.7.7.2 Installation of NTPM


In case of transmission via terrestrial lines, the NTPMs are placed inside the Service
rack, that is equipped with a mounting kit for NTPM, called frame F:NT.

NOTE
i It is necessary, to install a mounting kit MK:LE before mounting of the F:NT.

Each frame F:NT provides the equivalent space of 3 HU, allowing the installation of up
to 2 NTPM side by side.
The frame F:NT provides 3 interfaces:
– SubD 9, male with M3 fixings for -48 V output
– SubD 25, female with M3 fixings for PCM input
– SubD 25, male with M3 fixings for PCM output
In case of the BS-240, the power supply cable from the frame F:NT to the ACTC is part
of the F:NT. For the BS-240 II Service1A / Service2 racks use the DC power cable

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 165
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

S30864-X216-A109 for the connections between the link equipment breakers (4A) and
the -48VDC input of the F:NT.
For the PCM connection between the OVPT/ABISCON and the F:NT the pre-fabricated
cable S30864-X211-A59 should be used. An overview of the cabling if the F:NT is in-
stalled inside the racks is given in the following figure.

PCM lines BS-240 II / 240XL II PCM lines BS-240 / 240XL

Service Rack Base Rack Service Rack Base Rack

OVPT OVPT OVPT OVPT


PCM0 PCM1 6) PCM0 PCM1
6)
4) 4)

2) 2)
EMI panel EMI panel
DC panel ACTC
rack front ACTC rack front

-48 V
-48Vdc 2)
3) supply lines
1)
1)

PCM1 PCM1
PCM0 PCM0
F:CORE F:CORE

F:NT1 F:NT1
7)
5) 7) 5)
F:NT2 F:NT2

1) Integral part of cabinet cabling 5) see Figure: Interface on frame F:NT


2) has to be prepared on site 6) maximum of four PCM links per OVPT
3) power supply cable: S30864-X216-A109 7) 2 PCM links per F:NT if fully equipped with 2 modules
4) cable S30864-X211-A59

Fig. 2.166 Overview of NTPM cabling variants

166 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

- 48 VDC

to OVPT / ABISCON

external PCM lines

Fig. 2.167 Interfaces on frame F:NT

Name F:NT -48 V, subD 9 female pin

0V 1,2,6
-48 V 4,5,9

Tab. 2.62 Pin Assignments of -48 V interface of frame F:NT

Signal name F:NT PCM-INPUT subD 25 F:NT PCM-OUTPUT subD 25


female pin male pin

PCM 1 - ULA 1 1
PCM 1 - ULB 14 14
GND/G 3 3
PCM 1 - DLA 2 2
PCM 1 - DLB 15 15
GND/G 16 16
PCM 2 - ULA 4 4
PCM 2 - ULB 17 17
GND/G 6 6
PCM 2 - DLA 5 5
PCM 2 - DLB 18 18
GND/G 19 19

Tab. 2.63 Pin Assignments of PCM-Input and -Output connector of frame F:NT

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 167
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

2.8 Installation of the Modules


For later extension or maintenance it is useful to have a basic knowledge about the cor-
rect removal and replacement of the Core- and RF modules. Two variants for the fixing
of the modules in the subracks does exist. A lever mechanism will be used for fixing of
the Core modules COBA and COSA. Fixing screws at the upper and lower edge are
used for securing of the RF modules.The handling is shown in the figure below.

lever mechanism fixing screw

Fig. 2.168 Fixing variants of the modules

push together

lever mechanism in open position

Fig. 2.169 Handling of the lever mechanism

To prevent the installation of the plug-in modules at incorrect mounting positions, each
relevant modules provide code keys.

Module Code Key

DUAMCO 7
FICOM 7
DIAMCO 8
CU 6
COBA 1
COSA 2

Tab. 2.64 Module HW Code Key

168 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

2
code key no.

Fig. 2.170 Location of the code key no.

Pay attention to the following hints:


– After removal of a module check the proper condition of the code key plugs on the
backplane.
– Before a module will be plugged-in check the correct setting of the code key number,
this is to prevent damages at the backplane connectors (see table below).
– Insert the modules without pressure.

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 169
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

2.9 Nonstandard Installation Works


If an already installed BS-240 should be extended with Service2 racks to provide a long-
er battery backup time, the installation of a second AC/DC frame inside the Service1
rack can be necessary.

2.9.1 Installation of the AC/DC Frame


The AC/DC frame consist of the parts as shown in the figure below.
Complete the air duct first, but do not mount the duct before insert the fan unit connec-
tors into the fitting holes at the rear of the AC/DC frame.

AC/DC frame

air duct

air flaps

front cover

Fig. 2.171 Components of the AC/DC frame

Complete the air duct as displayed in Fig. 2.172 and Fig. 2.173 in steps as follows:
– Insert both air flaps into the air duct frame, so that the flaps will be opened by the
air outlet stream.
– Cover the air duct edges with the 4 rubber sealings.

Fig. 2.172 Fitting of the air flaps

170 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

rubber sealing

Fig. 2.173 Setup of the rubber sealing

Mount the AC/DC frame inside the Service1 rack as follows:


– Setup the AC/DC frame in the position as shown in the figure below onto the battery
tray.
– Open the cable ring in the upper rear of the rack and select the fan cables no. 51 and
no. 52.
– Insert the cable connectors into the fitting holes, so that the connectors can be easy
moved inside the hole.
– Pay attention to the correct cable no. because the connectors can not pulled out
without any damages.

51 52

Fig. 2.174 Plug-in of the fan cables

Install the connections between AC/DC frame 1 and 2:


– Mount the prepared air duct at the rear of the AC/DC frame with both screws provid-
ed with the air duct parts (see Fig. 2.175).
– Disconnect cable 91 from the CAN-OUT connector at the backplane of the AC/DC
frame 1 (see Fig. 2.175) and pull down the cable to AC/DC frame 2.
– Plug-in cable no. 89 at the CAN-OUT connector of AC/DC frame 1. The cable is pro-
vided with AC/DC frame 2.

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 171
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

disconnect cable no. 91

screw

AC/DC frame 1

Fig. 2.175 Air duct mounting, disconnection CAN-BUS cable no. 91

89

114

114

AC/DC frame 1 AC/DC frame 2

Fig. 2.176 Connection CAN-BUS and Interconnection Cable

– Plug-in the interconnection cable no. 114 at the connector position as displayed in
Fig. 2.176.
– Plug-in the CAN-BUS cable no. 89 at connector CAN-OUT of the AC/DC frame 1.
– Plug-in the interconnection cable no. 114 at the connector position as displayed in
Fig. 2.176 at AC/DC frame 2.
– Connect the cables no. 91 and 114 as shown in Fig. 2.177.

89

91

114

AC/DC frame 2 AC/DC frame 2

Fig. 2.177 Cable Connections at AC/DC frame 2

172 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

– Connect the CAN-BUS cable no. 89 at the CAN-IN connector of the AC/DC frame 2.
– Lift up the AC/DC frame to its mounting position (without gap below AC/DC frame 1).
– Fix the frame with 4 screws Torx T30.
Install the -48 V DC-connections to the DC-Panel of the Service1 rack and connect bat-
tery systems BAT2 and BAT3.
– Connect the cables no. 107 and 108 at the DC clamping block of the AC/DC frame 2.
– Connect the cables no. 110/3 and 111/3 (BAT2), 110/4 and 111/4 (BAT3) at the DC
clamping block of the AC/DC frame 2 if BS-240 Service2 are used.
In case of BS-240 II Service2 racks the cables no. 110/3M and 111/3M (BAT2),
110/4M and 111/4M (BAT3) have to be connect (see figure below).

107/B 108/B 107/A


107/A 108/A 107/B
108/B
108/A 111/4M
110/4M
111/3M
110/3M

AC/DC frame 2 AC/DC frame 1

Fig. 2.178 Connection of DC and Battery Cables

– Route the cable no. 229 (twisted pair wires, black / blue) from the AC/DC frame 2 to
to the ACTC of the Service1 rack.
– Remove the jumper at the BB1connector of the ACTC and insert the plug of the
cable no. 229.

229

remove jumper

229

Fig. 2.179 Routing of the Battery Breaker Cable

Complete the installation of the AC/DC frame 2:


– Plug in both fan units. Push down the lids (see Fig. 2.180) during the fitting.
– Fix the cover plates of the AC/DC frames 1 and 2.

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 173
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

press

Fig. 2.180 Fitting of the fans, closing the AC/DC frame

2.10 Setup of System Cabling


The system cabling consists of connections are installed on the front of the rack. Cabling
configurations depend on the different equipping variants (e.g., type of combining, ca-
pacity stage) and the cell configuration of the site.
The system cabling is already installed in the factory. This section provides information
for setup additional system cables for extension of RF modules or the cell configuration
must be changed.
System cables will be shipped in a box to avoid twisting and damage. Before starting the
connection procedure, refer to the site documentation and determine the types and
number of cables.
The list of variant numbers (content of the site specific documentation) is needed for the
correct setup of the cabling between the modules.

NOTE
i For further informations refer to “Configuration Rules for System Cabling”.

174 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

2.10.1 System Cabling with semi-rigid Cables


NOTE
i A minimum bending radius of 10 mm (semi-rigid.141 AI) and 3,5 mm (semi-rigid .86 AI)
must be ensured.
Fix the system cables at SMA connectors with a torque wrench set to 1,00 Nm and at
SMC connectors with a torque wrench set to 0,35 Nm.
Terminate all unused connectors of the antenna combiners with 50 Ohm load resistors!

Fig. 2.181 Example of system cabling with semi-rigid cable

The following table provides an overview of the types and functionality of the prefabri-
cated cables.

connection code number length Path connector cable type

DUAMCO 0/3- C39195-Z80- 1600 RX SMC,90˚,male/ semi-rigid


CU 0/1,4/5 C113 mm SMC,90˚,male .086 Al
DUAMCO 1/2- C39195-Z80- 1250 RX SMC,90˚,male/ semi-rigid
CU 2/3,6/7 C118 mm SMC,90˚,male .086 Al
DUAMCO 0/3- C39195-Z80- 1250 TX SMA,90˚,male/ semi-rigid
CU 0/1,4/5 C160 mm SMA,90˚,male .141 Al
DUAMCO 1/2- C39195-Z80- 1050 TX SMA,90˚,male/ semi-rigid
CU 2/3,6/7 C114 mm SMA,90˚,male .141 Al
FICOM-0/3 C39195-Z80- 1250 TX SMA,90˚,male/ semi-rigid
CU 0/1,4/5 C160 mm SMA,90˚,male .141 Al
FICOM-1/2 C39195-Z80- 1050 TX SMA,90˚,male/ semi-rigid
CU 2/3,6/7 C114 mm SMA,90˚,male .141 Al
DIAMCO-0 C39195-Z80- 600 RX SMC,90˚,male/ semi-rigid
CU 1,2/3,4/6,7 C116 mm SMC,90˚,male .086 Al

Tab. 2.65 Functionality of system cables BS-240 / 240 II

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 175
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

connection code number length Path connector cable type

DIAMCO-0/1 C39195-Z80- 750 RX SMC,90˚,male/ semi-rigid


CU 0/5 C117 mm SMC,90˚,male .086 Al
DIAMCO-1 C39195-Z80- 600 RX SMC,90˚,male/ semi-rigid
CU 2/3,4,6/7 C116 mm SMC,90˚,male .086 Al
HPDU (Rack)- C39195-Z80- 1250 RX SMA,90˚,male/ semi-rigid
DIAMCO C174 mm N-Con,90˚,male .141 Al
HPDU- C39195-Z80- 400 TX 7/16,90˚,male/ 1/2” jum-per
FICOM (Rack) C173 mm 7/16,90˚,male cable
DIAMCO (Rack C39195-Z80- 2700 Cas- SMA,90˚,male/ Coax flexible
0) - C176 mm cad N-Con,90˚,male
DIAMCO (Rack
1)
BIAS-T - DIAM- C39195-Z80- 1450 RX SMA,90˚,male/ semi-rigid
CO C181 mm N-Con,90˚,male .141 Al
BIAS-T - HPDU C39195-Z80- 410 RX SMA,90˚,male/ semi-rigid
C180 mm SMA,90˚,male .141 Al

Tab. 2.65 Functionality of system cables BS-240 / 240 II

connection code number length Path connector cable type

DUAMCO 0/3- CU C39195-Z80- 1800 RX SMC,90˚,male/ semi-rigid


0/1/6/7 C206 mm SMC,90˚,male .086 Al
DUAMCO 0/1/2/3 C39195-Z80- 1600 RX SMC,90˚,male/ semi-rigid
CU 2/3/8/9 C113 mm SMC,90˚,male .086 Al
DUAMCO 0/1/2/3- C39195-Z80- 1350 RX SMC,90˚,male/ semi-rigid
CU 4/5/10/11 C118 mm SMC,90˚,male .086 Al
DUAMCO 0/3- CU C39195-Z80- 1650 TX SMA,90˚,male/ semi-rigid
0/1/6/7 C204 mm SMA,90˚,male .141 Al
DUAMCO 0/1/2/3- C39195-Z80- 1250 TX SMA,90˚,male/ semi-rigid
CU 2/3/8/9 C160 mm SMA,90˚,male .141 Al
DUAMCO 0/1/2/3- C39195-Z80- 1050 TX SMA,90˚,male/ semi-rigid
CU 4/5/10/11 C114 mm SMA,90˚,male .141 Al

Tab. 2.66 Functionality of system cables BS-240XL / XL II

NOTE
i In case of expansion of a FICOM base module with FICOM expansion modules, a short
semi-flex cable (C39195-Z80-C137) will be connected between the RF/EXP connectors
(N-type, female) of the modules. Fix the cable at the N-type connectors and screw the
connection to a “fingertight” torque (approx. 1,00 Nm). Avoid the twisting of the cable
connectors during the connection.

176 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

2.10.2 System Cabling with Flexi-Cables


NOTE
i Fix the system cables at SMA connectors with a torque wrench set to 1,00 Nm and at
SMC connectors with a torque wrench set to 0,35 Nm. Terminate all unused connectors
of the antenna combiners with 50 Ohm load resistors!

The cables have to be routed in such a way that allows the ease exchange of modules
(CUs, Combiners and FANs). For this reason BTS Base-/Extension cabinets which have
been equipped with flexible HF cabling in the factory always, come with a pair of cable-
retainers fitted left-and right hand side at the bottom of each sub-rack (exception: lowest
subrack of a cabinet).
Route the cables, so that the LED-indications of the modules are visible and the test
adapter connectors are accessible.
The task of these cable retainers - which are bended sheet metal parts - is to keep those
flexible HF-cables in a neat position which inter-connect subracks.
If a customer decides to retrofit an 1th generation base station - which has not been
equipped with cable-retainers -with flexible HF cables, these cables must be loosely fit-
ted with cable-ties.

NOTE
i Attention: Fitting of HF cables with cable-ties is not allowed for base stations equipped
with these cable retainers.

Fig. 2.182 Example of system cabling with flexible cables

NOTE
i The minimum single bending radius of the flexible cables is 20 mm. The minimum re-
peated bending radius is 40 mm. The exceptional length of the cables have to be stored
inside the vertical space between the subracks and the rack. The horizontal space be-
low each subrack have not to be used to store the extra length of the system cables or
anything else. This space is used as an air inlet for cooling.

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 177
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

connection code number length Path connector

ACOM - FlexCU S30864-X217-A14 1800 mm RX SMC,90˚,female/


SMC,90˚,female
ACOM - FlexCU S30864-X217-A13 1600 mm RX SMC,90˚,female/
SMC,90˚,female
ACOM - FlexCU S30864-X217-A15 1400 mm RX SMC,90˚,female/
SMC,90˚,female
ACOM - FlexCU S30864-X217-A26 600 mm RX SMC,90˚,male/
SMC,90˚,male
ACOM - FlexCU S30864-X217-A27 750 mm RX SMC,90˚,male/
SMC,90˚,male
ACOM - FlexCU S30864-X217-A48 400 mm RX SMC,90˚,male/
SMC,90˚,male
ACOM - FlexCU S30864-X217-A50 1000 mm RX SMC,90˚,male/
SMC,90˚,male
ACOM - FlexCU S30864-X217-A51 1200 mm RX SMC,90˚,male/
SMC,90˚,male
ACOM - FlexCU S30864-X217-A39 390 mm TX SMA,90˚,male/
SMA,90˚,male
ACOM - FlexCU S30864-X217-A49 600 mm TX SMA,90˚,male/
SMA,90˚,male
ACOM - FlexCU S30864-X217-A54 800 mm TX SMA,90˚,male/
SMA,90˚,male
ACOM - FlexCU S30864-X217-A25 1050 mm TX SMA,90˚,male/
SMA,90˚,male
ACOM - FlexCU S30864-X217-A24 1250 mm TX SMA,90˚,male/
SMA,90˚,male
ACOM - FlexCU S30864-X217-A52 1400 mm TX SMA,90˚,male/
SMA,90˚,male
ACOM - FlexCU S30864-X217-A23 1600 mm TX SMA,90˚,male/
SMA,90˚,male
ACOM - FlexCU S30864-X217-A53 1800 mm TX SMA,90˚,male/
SMA,90˚,male

Tab. 2.67 BS-240 II / 240 XL II, flexible system cable types

NOTE
i In case of expansion of a FICOM base module with FICOM expansion modules, a short
semi-flex cable (C39195-Z80-C137) will be connected between the RF/EXP connectors
(N-type, female) of the modules. N-type connectors should work when 'finger tight".
There doesn't appear to be a consensus on how much torque this is in detail. Connector
suppliers recommends a torque of approx. 1,00 Nm. Avoid the twisting of the cable con-
nectors during the connection.

178 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

2.10.3 Terminators
It is necessary to terminate all unused RF-connectors of the RF-modules with 50 Ohm
load resistors.The following resistors are used:
– C39195-Z80-C30 for SMA connectors
– C39195-Z80-C31 for SMC connectors
Fix the terminators at SMA connectors with a torque wrench set 1.00 Nm and at SMC
connectors with a torque wrench set 0.35 Nm. Later removal of terminators must done
with extreme care, to avoid damages at the RF front connectors of the modules.

NOTE
i DUAMCO: If no RX and RXCA connector is used, the connectors need not to be termi-
nated. If at least one RX or RXCA connector is used, it is necessary to terminate all un-
used RX# connectors with a 50 Ohm SMC load resistor and RXCA# connectors with a
50 Ohm SMA load resistor. In normal operation all open TX# inputs need not to be ter-
minated.
DIAMCO: If no RX and RXCA connector is used, the connectors need not to be termi-
nated. If at least one RX or RXCA connector is used, it is necessary to terminate all un-
used RX# connectors and RXCA# connectors with a 50 Ohm load resistors.
FICOM: In normal operation all open TX connectors need not to be terminated. An open
expansion connector RF EXP has to be terminated with the terminator delivered with
the FICOM base module.

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 179
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

2.11 Post Installation Notes


The following instructions must carried before leaving the site:
– At the end of the working day enable any alarms that should be active.
– Contact the Network Control Center to announce your departure.
– Close and lock the rack doors.
– Ensure the site is secure or hand over to the person in charge / caretaker
If all installation activities are finished, any garbage must be cleared from site. Remove
all packing material for recycling.

WARNING
!
The burning of rubbish should be avoided, as a burning of packaging material may give
off toxic gases.

NOTE
i For dehydrating the rack during transportation and storage, a bag filled with Silica Gel
is fitted into the rack by the factory. It is recommended to remove the bag, because after
a certain time the bag lost his function.

2.11.1 Disposal of Electrical and Electronic Equipment

The correct disposal and separate collection of your old appliance will help prevent
potential negative consequences for the environment and human health. It is a precon-
dition for reuse and recycling of used electrical and electronic equipment.
For more detailed information about disposal of your old appliance, please contact your
sales representative.
The statements quoted above are only fully valid for equipment which is installed in the
countries of the European Union and is covered by the directive 2002/96/EC.
Countries outside the European Union may have other regulations regarding the
disposal of electrical and electronic equipment.
All electrical and electronic products should be disposed of separately from the
municipal waste stream via designated collection facilities appointed by the government
or the local authorities.

180 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

3 Appendix

3.1 Installation Tools


The correct installation is carried out with the aid of the following tools:
– Standard toolkit for BSS-installation H89999-B633
– Tool set B89999-B148
– Torque wrench set for SMA connectors (1,00 Nm)
– Torque wrench set for SMC connectors (0,35 Nm)
– Torque wrench 32 mm (25 Nm) for 7/16” connector mounting
– Screw driver for torx screws T8, T10, T20, T25, T30, T40, T50 (length 200 mm)
– Long screw driver for torx screws T30 (length 400 mm)
– Engineer‘s wrenches for M12, M42 (SW 19, 65 mm)
– Ratchet with insets for nuts M4, M5, M6, M8, M10 (SW 7, 8, 10, 13, 17 mm)
– Security torx bit IPR25 (delivered by OMP)
– Insulated torque wrench for Torx T30 (6 Nm) and an open ended 17 mm (20 Nm) for
battery mounting
– Insulated hexagonal socket screw key or ratchet (M6) for connecting DC cables to
AD panel (Service1A) and DC panels (Base and Extension)
– Tool for the removal / replacement of gas filled surge arrestor in the OVPT
(C39407-A149-A6)
– Screw drivers for hexagonal socket screw or hexagonal socket screw key SW 4 mm
– Screw driver for slotted screw M3, M4, M5
– Screw driver for pozi drive screws M3, M4, M5
– Vacuum cleaner
– Trimming tool for RF cables
– 90˚ offset screw driver for torx screws T20
– Adjuster feed wrench M42 (SW65)
– Flat spanner SW19, SW50
– Trimming tool for 1/2” coaxial cables
– Hot air gun (or propane/butane blow torch)
– Hard hat, dust mask
– 4 ft step ladder
– Fall protection equipment (for working in dangerous heights)
For installation of power supply, transmission equipment, antennas, cableways and
other infrastructure equipment, additional tools may be necessary.
Refer for additional information to the Tool and Testequipment Database in the Siemens
intranet: https://tte.erlm.siemens.de.

3.2 Ancillary Material


The following ancillary materials are needed:
– adhesive tape
– cable ties (different length)
– wire end sleeves for 16 mm copper wires
– cable lugs M8
– paint retouch kit (Siemens Serial No. A500-C101-B261)
– heat-shrink set including: heat-shrink sleeve for 1/2” coaxial cables (with adhesive
coating), cleaning tissue, heat protection tape, emery paper

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 181
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

3.3 Technical Data of BS-240/240XL

Parameter BS-240 / 240 II BS-240XL / 240 XL II

overall dimensions (HxWxD) 1600 x 600 x 450 mm 2050 x 600 x 450 mm


weights:
rack (unequipped): 60 kg / 60 kg 80 kg / 80 kg
frame with 4 ACOM 40 kg / 60 kg 40 kg / 60 kg
frame with 4 CU + 2 MUCO 40 kg / 40 kg 40 kg / 40 kg
frame with 6 AC/DC 27 kg / 35 kg 27 kg / 35 kg
frame with battery set* 130-180 kg / 130-180 kg 130-180 kg / 130-180 kg
DC Panel 10 kg 10 kg
*dependend on battery type

mains input voltage (nominal): -48 Vdc -48 Vdc


input voltage range: -40,5 Vdc up to -57 Vdc -40,5 Vdc up to -57 Vdc
mains input voltage (nominal): 3 x 230 Vac 3 x 230 Vac
input voltage range: 207 Vac to 253 Vac 207 Vac to 253 Vac
frequency (nominal): 50 Hz 50 Hz
frequency range: 45 Hz to 65 Hz 45 Hz to 65 Hz
AC/DC converter 1600 W 1600 W
nominal output power
power consumption:
TMA 9W 9W
AMCO 25,5 W 25,5 W
MUCO 12,5 W 12,5 W
CU (GSM) 150 W per module 150 W per module
ECU (Edge) 210 W per module 210 W per module
FCU 310 W per module 310 W per module
COBA 17 W 17 W
COSA 17 W 17 W
DC panel 10 W 10 W
frame 60 W 60 W
ACOM 43 W 43 W
battery set 20 W 20 W
location condition: indoor
Abis link media: wire, fibre optic, microwave
CU per single rack: max. 8 max. 12
multiple cell per BTSE max. 12
no. of CU per Cell 1 - 12

Tab. 3.1 Technical Data of BS-240 / 240 II / 240XL / 240 XL II

182 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

Parameter BS-240 / 240 II BS-240XL / 240 XL II

external interfaces:
TX/RX antenna 7/16, female
Abis interface terminal block (120 Ohm) or
1.0/2.3 coaxial connectors female (75 Ohm)
mains input AC terminal block (max. AWG 8)
mains input DC terminal block (max. AWG 6), BS-240
terminal block (max. AWG 2), BS-240 II,
BS-240XL / XL II
ground connection bolt M8
external alarms spring terminal blocks
LMT SubD 15, female, RJ45 connector

Tab. 3.1 Technical Data of BS-240 / 240 II / 240XL / 240 XL II

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 183
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

3.4 Configuration Overview


PULL: IDXxxx004097
Rack: Baserack
BTS EQUIPMENT PLUS BS-240 BASE Rack SIEMENS
23. March 2002
AD400S2268D (Sales Unique Name)

FUSE PANEL

FAN 0 FAN 1

F: ACOM

ACOM 0 ACOM 1 ACOM 2 ACOM 3

FAN 2 FAN 3
F: CU

CU 2 CU 3 DIAMCO 0 DIAMCO 1 CU 6 CU 7

FAN 4 FAN 5
F: CORE
CORE 0

CORE 1

CORE 2

CORE 3

CU 0 CU 1 CU 4 CU 5

Cell 0 1 2 3
Configuration
ACOM no.

Fig. 3.1 Example for Configuration Overview (BS-240)

184 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

3.5 Checklist for Base Station Installation

Check Item Yes No

Rack fixed to floor and wall (wall excepted in erthquake zones)


Grounding
BTS connected to ground as described in section “External
Cabling Activities”
Cable screens of all cables connected to ground at the cable
window of the building
Power Supply
Cross section of power supply cable sufficient
power supply connection correspondend to TNS-or TT Network
requirements
Cable window of the installation building equipped with lightning
conductor
Cross section correspondend to cable length
External Alarms
External alarm cables with braided screen
Cable screen contacted to metal lid of cable feeding module
Cable screen contacted to ground at both ends
Overvoltage protection equipment present and correct installed
PCM Cables
PCM cables with braided screen
Cable screens connected with EMI panel of rack
Cable screen contacted to ground at both ends
CSU connector for cable screens correspondend to
EMC requirements
Overvoltage protection equipment correct installed (if present)
Antenna Cables
Outer conductor of antenna cables connected to ground at
antenna window
Grounding of antenna cables between antenna and antenna win-
dow correpondend to grounding guideline
Antenna cable conductor protected against humidity at the
ground points

Tab. 3.2 Checklist for BS-240/240XL Installation

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 185
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

186 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631
Installation IMN:BTSE
Base Transceiver Station Equipment BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II

4 Abbreviations
AC Alternating Current
ACTC Alarm Collection Terminal Connection
Board
ACTM Alarm Collection Terminal for Base/Shelter
BSS Base Station System
BTS Base Transceiver Station
BTSE Base Transceiver Station Equipment
CAN Controller Area Network
COBA Core Basis
COSA Core Satellite
CU Carrier Unit
DC Direct Current
DIAMCO Dual Inline Amplifier Multicoupler
DUAMCO Duplexer Amplifier Multicoupler
DUBIAS Duplexer Bias Path
EMI Electromagnetic Interference
ESD Electrostatically Sensitive Device
FICOM FICOM
HPDU High Power Duplexer
HX Heat Exchanger
LE Link Equipment
NTPM Network Termination for PCM30
OVPT Overvoltage Protection and Tracer
PCM Pulse Code Modulation
RF Radio Frequency
SBS Siemens Base Station System

A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631 187
IMN:BTSE Installation
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 XL / 240XL II Base Transceiver Station Equipment

188 A30808-X3247-K380-17-7631